User Guide
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5601
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5601 - User
Guide
SUMMARY
This guide provides conguration, use, warranty, safety and environmental information.
Legal information
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2026 HP Development
Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to
change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Edition 1, 6/2026
Trademark Credits
Adobe
®
, Adobe Photoshop
®
, Acrobat
®
, and
PostScript
®
are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
macOS is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
AirPrint is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Google™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows Server®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
UNIX
®
is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.
Table of contents
1 Printer overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Warning icons.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1
Potential shock hazard........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2
Printer views ( 5601dn).......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2
Printer front view..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2
Printer rear view............................................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Control-panel view......................................................................................................................................................................................................................4
Printer specications...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................7
Technical specications ( 5601dn)...............................................................................................................................................................................7
Supported operating systems..........................................................................................................................................................................................8
Mobile printing solutions........................................................................................................................................................................................................9
Printer dimensions ( 5601dn)........................................................................................................................................................................................10
Power consumption, electrical specications, and acoustic emissions ....................................................................................11
Operating-environment range ......................................................................................................................................................................................11
Printer hardware setup and software installation.....................................................................................................................................................11
2 Paper trays ...........................................................................................................................................................................................12
Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)..........................................................................................................................................................................12
Load Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)....................................................................................................................................................................................12
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper orientation.....................................................................................................................................................15
Load paper to Tray 2-5.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................18
Load Tray 2 or the optional 550-sheet trays......................................................................................................................................................18
Tray 2 and the optional 550-sheet trays paper orientation...................................................................................................................21
Use alternative letterhead mode................................................................................................................................................................................24
Load and print envelopes..............................................................................................................................................................................................................24
Print envelopes..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................25
Tray 1 envelope orientation.............................................................................................................................................................................................25
Envelope Feeder Kit envelope orientation...........................................................................................................................................................26
Load and print labels.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................26
Manually feed labels .............................................................................................................................................................................................................26
Label orientation.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................27
3 Supplies, accessories, and parts.................................................................................................................................................28
Order supplies, accessories, and parts............................................................................................................................................................................28
Ordering..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................28
Supplies...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................28
Accessories.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................29
Customer self-repair parts..............................................................................................................................................................................................29
Congure the HP toner-supply-protection settings.................................................................................................................................................30
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................30
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature................................................................................................................................................31
iii
Enable or disable the Supply Protection feature............................................................................................................................................33
Replace the toner cartridge........................................................................................................................................................................................................35
Toner cartridge information............................................................................................................................................................................................35
Remove and replace the toner cartridge .............................................................................................................................................................37
4 Print .........................................................................................................................................................................................................41
Print tasks (Windows).......................................................................................................................................................................................................................41
How to print (Windows)........................................................................................................................................................................................................41
Automatically print on both sides (Windows) ....................................................................................................................................................42
Manually print on both sides (Windows) ...............................................................................................................................................................42
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)............................................................................................................................................................42
Select the paper type (Windows)................................................................................................................................................................................43
Additional print tasks............................................................................................................................................................................................................43
Print tasks (macOS)...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................44
How to print (macOS)............................................................................................................................................................................................................44
Automatically print on both sides (macOS) ........................................................................................................................................................44
Manually print on both sides (macOS)....................................................................................................................................................................44
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)................................................................................................................................................................45
Select the paper type (macOS)....................................................................................................................................................................................45
Additional print tasks............................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately...........................................................................................................................46
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
Create a stored job (Windows)......................................................................................................................................................................................46
Create a stored job (macOS)..........................................................................................................................................................................................47
Print a stored job ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................48
Delete a stored job..................................................................................................................................................................................................................48
Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes.......................................................................................................................49
Mobile printing.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................49
Mobile printing solutions....................................................................................................................................................................................................49
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing..................................................................................................................................................49
AirPrint..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................50
Android embedded printing ............................................................................................................................................................................................51
Print from a USB ash drive........................................................................................................................................................................................................51
Enable the USB port for printing..................................................................................................................................................................................51
Print USB documents...........................................................................................................................................................................................................52
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired)...................................................................................................................................................................53
Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel menus.............................................53
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-
connected printers only)....................................................................................................................................................................................................53
5 Copy.........................................................................................................................................................................................................55
Make a copy.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................55
Copy on both sides (duplex)........................................................................................................................................................................................................57
Additional copy tasks.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................59
6 Scan.........................................................................................................................................................................................................60
Set up Scan to Email.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................60
iv
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................60
Before you begin ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................60
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)..........................................................................................................................61
Step two: Congure the Network Identication settings.........................................................................................................................61
Step three: Congure the Send to Email feature............................................................................................................................................62
Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional).................................................................................................................................................71
Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use Ofce 365 Outlook (optional)............................................................................................71
Set up Scan to Network Folder.................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Before you begin ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)..........................................................................................................................74
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder.............................................................................................................................................................75
Set up Scan to SharePoint...........................................................................................................................................................................................................84
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................84
Before you begin ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................84
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)..........................................................................................................................85
Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set.............................................................85
Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site..................................................................................................................................................................87
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint..............................................................................................................88
Set up Scan to USB Drive..............................................................................................................................................................................................................90
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................90
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)..........................................................................................................................90
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive.........................................................................................................................................................................90
Step three: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)..............................................................................................................................................91
Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup......................................................................................................................................92
Default le settings for Save to USB setup.........................................................................................................................................................92
Scan to email..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................93
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................93
Scan to email...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................93
Scan to job storage............................................................................................................................................................................................................................96
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................96
Scan to job storage on the printer..............................................................................................................................................................................96
Print from job storage on the printer........................................................................................................................................................................98
Scan to network folder....................................................................................................................................................................................................................98
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................98
Scan to network folder........................................................................................................................................................................................................99
Scan to SharePoint.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Scan to SharePoint..............................................................................................................................................................................................................101
Scan to USB drive ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................103
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................103
Scan to USB drive.................................................................................................................................................................................................................103
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions...................................................................................................................................................................105
Additional scan tasks....................................................................................................................................................................................................................105
7 Fax.........................................................................................................................................................................................................107
v
Set up fax................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................107
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................107
Set up fax by using the printer control panel...................................................................................................................................................107
Change fax congurations.......................................................................................................................................................................................................108
Fax dialing settings..............................................................................................................................................................................................................108
General fax send settings..............................................................................................................................................................................................109
Fax receive settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................110
Change fax congurations.......................................................................................................................................................................................................111
Fax dialing settings..............................................................................................................................................................................................................111
General fax send settings..............................................................................................................................................................................................112
Fax receive settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................112
Send a fax...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................113
Create a fax printing schedule...............................................................................................................................................................................................115
Block incoming faxes.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................116
Create a list of blocked fax numbers.....................................................................................................................................................................116
Delete numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers............................................................................................................................116
Additional fax tasks.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................117
8 Manage the printer.........................................................................................................................................................................118
Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)......................................................................................................118
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................118
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).............................................................................................................................119
HP Embedded Web Server features .....................................................................................................................................................................119
Congure IP network settings................................................................................................................................................................................................128
Printer sharing disclaimer.............................................................................................................................................................................................128
View or change network settings............................................................................................................................................................................128
Rename the printer on a network.............................................................................................................................................................................129
Manually congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel...........................................................................................129
Manually congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel...........................................................................................130
Link speed and duplex settings.................................................................................................................................................................................130
Printer security features.............................................................................................................................................................................................................131
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................131
Security statements ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................131
Assign an administrator password.........................................................................................................................................................................131
IP Security ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................132
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks.......................................................................................................133
Lock the formatter...............................................................................................................................................................................................................133
Energy-conservation settings................................................................................................................................................................................................133
Print with EconoMode.......................................................................................................................................................................................................133
Set the sleep timer and congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power......................................................................133
Set the sleep schedule.....................................................................................................................................................................................................134
HP Web Jetadmin.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................134
Software and rmware updates..........................................................................................................................................................................................134
9 Solve problems.................................................................................................................................................................................135
Customer support...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................135
vi
Control panel help system.........................................................................................................................................................................................................135
Reset factory settings..................................................................................................................................................................................................................136
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................136
Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel.............................................................................................136
Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers
only) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................136
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel or EWS.......................137
Change the “Very Low” settings................................................................................................................................................................................137
Order supplies ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................138
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds ................................................................................................................................................................138
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................138
The printer does not pick up paper.........................................................................................................................................................................139
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper................................................................................................................................................140
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper...............................................................................143
Clear paper jams..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................144
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................144
Paper jam locations............................................................................................................................................................................................................144
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams...........................................................................................................................................................144
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?........................................................................................................................................145
31.13.yz Clear paper jams in the document feeder .................................................................................................................................145
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1.........................................................................................................................................................................................149
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2.........................................................................................................................................................................................153
13.A3 jam error in tray 3 .................................................................................................................................................................................................158
13.A4 jam error in tray 4 .................................................................................................................................................................................................161
13.A5 jam error in tray 5 .................................................................................................................................................................................................165
13.A6 jam error in tray 6 .................................................................................................................................................................................................169
13.B2 jam error in top door...........................................................................................................................................................................................172
13.B4 jam error in rear door (fuser) .......................................................................................................................................................................175
13.B9 jam error in rear door (fuser) .......................................................................................................................................................................177
13.D3 jam error in duplexer..........................................................................................................................................................................................179
13.E1 jam error in output bin.......................................................................................................................................................................................181
Resolving mono print quality problems ..........................................................................................................................................................................183
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................183
Troubleshoot print quality..............................................................................................................................................................................................183
Improve copy image quality .....................................................................................................................................................................................................195
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges...........................................................................................................................................195
Calibrate the scanner.......................................................................................................................................................................................................197
Check the paper settings...............................................................................................................................................................................................198
Check the image-adjustment settings................................................................................................................................................................198
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures..........................................................................................................................................................198
Edge-to-edge copying.......................................................................................................................................................................................................199
Improve scan image quality.....................................................................................................................................................................................................199
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges...........................................................................................................................................199
Check the resolution settings.....................................................................................................................................................................................201
Check the color settings.................................................................................................................................................................................................202
Check the image-adjustment settings................................................................................................................................................................202
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures .........................................................................................................................................................203
vii
Check the output-quality settings...........................................................................................................................................................................203
Improve fax image quality..........................................................................................................................................................................................................204
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges...........................................................................................................................................204
Check the send-fax resolution settings..............................................................................................................................................................206
Check the image-adjustment settings................................................................................................................................................................206
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures..............................................................................................................................................................207
Check the error-correction setting.........................................................................................................................................................................207
Check the t-to-page setting.......................................................................................................................................................................................208
Send to a different fax machine................................................................................................................................................................................208
Check the sender's fax machine..............................................................................................................................................................................208
Solve wired network problems ..............................................................................................................................................................................................208
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................208
Poor physical connection...............................................................................................................................................................................................209
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer...................................................................................................................209
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network.....................................................................................209
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems............................................................................................209
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly...................................................................................................................210
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.....................................................................................................210
Solve wireless network problems .......................................................................................................................................................................................210
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................210
Wireless connectivity checklist.................................................................................................................................................................................210
The printer does not print after the wireless conguration completes.....................................................................................211
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party rewall installed..............................................................211
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer.....................................................211
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer....................................................................................................................212
The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN......................................................................................212
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list................................................................................................................212
The wireless network is not functioning.............................................................................................................................................................212
Reduce interference on a wireless network....................................................................................................................................................213
Solve fax problems..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................213
Checklist for solving fax problems..........................................................................................................................................................................213
General fax problems........................................................................................................................................................................................................215
Appendix A Service and support ..................................................................................................................................................217
HP limited warranty statement..............................................................................................................................................................................................217
UK, Ireland, and Malta ........................................................................................................................................................................................................218
Austria, Belgium, Germany, Luxemburg. and Switzerland....................................................................................................................219
Belgium, France, Luxemburg, and Switzerland..............................................................................................................................................219
Italy...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................222
Spain...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................222
Denmark......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................223
Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................223
Sweden.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................223
Portugal........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................223
Greece and Cyprus.............................................................................................................................................................................................................224
Hungary........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................224
Czech Republic.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................225
Slovakia........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................225
viii
Poland............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................225
Bulgaria........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................226
Romania.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................226
Belgium and the Netherlands.....................................................................................................................................................................................226
Finland...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................227
Slovenia........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................227
Croatia ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................227
Latvia..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................228
Lithuania......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................228
Estonia...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................228
Limited Warranty Statement for HP Print Cartridges, Imaging Drums, and Imaging Units for use with HP
LaserJet Printers, HP Laser Printers and Samsung Branded Laser Printers....................................................................................229
Long life consumable and maintenance kit limited warranty statement..............................................................................................229
HP policy on non-HP supplies..................................................................................................................................................................................................229
HP anticounterfeit Web site.....................................................................................................................................................................................................229
Data stored on the toner cartridge....................................................................................................................................................................................230
End User License Agreement.................................................................................................................................................................................................230
Customer self-repair warranty service ..........................................................................................................................................................................234
Customer support...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................235
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program.................................................................................................236
Protecting the environment......................................................................................................................................................................................................236
Battery information ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................236
Battery Notice for Brazil (for printers with non-removable battery).........................................................................................................236
Chemical substances...................................................................................................................................................................................................................237
Electronic hardware recycling................................................................................................................................................................................................237
EPEAT.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................237
Material restrictions.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................237
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)..................................................................................................................................................................................237
Ozone production ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................237
Paper..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................237
Paper use................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................238
Plastics.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................238
Power consumption .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................238
HP LaserJet print supplies........................................................................................................................................................................................................238
Toner consumption.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................238
For more information.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................239
Brazil hardware recycling information.............................................................................................................................................................................239
Substances Table (China)..........................................................................................................................................................................................................240
SEPA Ecolabel User Information (China)........................................................................................................................................................................240
The regulation of the implementation on China energy label for printer, fax, and copier........................................................241
ix
Disposal of waste equipment by users (EU, UK, and India)...............................................................................................................................241
EU Microplastics ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................241
Product Power Data per European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 (EU)................................................................242
India Battery Waste Management (BWM) Rules.....................................................................................................................................................242
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (India) ................................................................................................................................242
Substances Table (Taiwan)........................................................................................................................................................................................................243
WEEE (Turkey)......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................244
Appendix C Regulatory information ............................................................................................................................................245
Regulatory statements................................................................................................................................................................................................................245
Regulatory model identication numbers........................................................................................................................................................245
European Union & United Kingdom Regulatory Notice...........................................................................................................................245
European Union Consumer Laser Product.......................................................................................................................................................246
FCC regulations.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................246
Australia/New Zealand.....................................................................................................................................................................................................246
Canada - Industry Canada ICES Compliance Statement ....................................................................................................................246
VCCI statement (Japan)..................................................................................................................................................................................................246
Power cord instructions ..................................................................................................................................................................................................246
Power cord statement (Japan)...................................................................................................................................................................................247
Product Safety Statements..........................................................................................................................................................................................247
EMC statement (China)....................................................................................................................................................................................................247
EMC statement (Korea)....................................................................................................................................................................................................247
EMC statement (Taiwan)..................................................................................................................................................................................................247
Laser safety ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................247
Laser statement for Finland.........................................................................................................................................................................................247
Nordic Statements (Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden)....................................................................................................................248
GS statement (Germany)................................................................................................................................................................................................248
Eurasian Conformity (Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan)................................................................................................249
Taiwan BSMI USB Port (Walk-up) statement....................................................................................................................................................249
Battery statements ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................250
Coin/button cell battery safety statements....................................................................................................................................................250
Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 251
x
Printer overview1
Review the location of features on the printer, the physical and technical specications of the printer, and
where to locate setup information.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Warning icons
Use caution if you see a warning icon on your HP printer, as indicated in the icon denitions.
Figure 1-1 Caution: Electric shock
Figure 1-2 Caution: Hot surface
Figure 1-3 Caution: Keep body parts away from moving parts
Figure 1-4 Caution: Sharp edge in close proximity
Figure 1-5 Warning
Printer overview
1
Potential shock hazard
Review this important safety information.
● Read and understand these safety statements to avoid an electrical shock hazard.
● Always follow basic safety precautions when using this product to reduce risk of injury from re or
electric shock.
● Read and understand all instructions in the user guide.
● Observe all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
● Use only a grounded electrical outlet when connecting the product to a power source. If you do not
know whether the outlet is grounded, check with a qualied electrician.
● Do not touch the contacts on any of the sockets on the product. Replace damaged cords immediately.
● Unplug this product from wall outlets before cleaning.
● Do not install or use this product near water or when you are wet.
● Install the product securely on a stable surface.
● Install the product in a protected location where no one can step on or trip over the power cord.
● Do not place anything on top of the product. (For example, water, small metal or heavy objects,
candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or re.
Printer views ( 5601dn)
Identify certain parts of the printer and the control panel.
Printer front view
Locate features on the front of the printer.
2
Chapter 1 Printer overview
Figure 1-6 Printer front view
2 31
4
5
6
7
8
9
Table 1-1 Printer front components
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
2 Automatic document feeder input tray
3 Automatic document feeder output tray
4 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for connecting accessory and third-party devices
5 Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
6 Tray 2
7 Output bin
8 On/Off button
9 Color touchscreen control panel (tilts up for easier viewing)
Printer rear view
Locate features on the rear of the printer.
Printer rear view
3
Figure 1-7 Printer rear view
5
4
13
12
11
1 2 3
6
8
10
7
9
Table 1-2 Rear components
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder output tray
2 Automatic document feeder input tray
3 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
4 Walk-up USB
5 Toner cartridge door release button
6 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 interface port
7 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
8 SuperSpeed USB 3.0 host port (for job storage and private printing)
9 Fax "line in" port (for attaching the fax phone line to the printer)
10 Power connection
11 Serial number and product number label
12 Tray 2 legal extension cover
13 Rear door access (for clearing jams)
Control-panel view
The control panel provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.
The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer conguration.
4
Chapter 1 Printer overview
Figure 1-8 Color touchscreen control panel
3
4
5
6
7
1 2
Table 1-3 Control panel components
Item Control Description
1 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings
and is always present if users are not logged in. The Reset
button is not present when the Sign Out button is present.
Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from
the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the
quick copy count in the copy count eld, exit special
modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.
2 Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The
printer restores all options to the default settings.
NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has
congured the printer to require permission for access to
features.
3
Information button
● Display Language: Change the language setting for
the current user session.
● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.
● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect
directly to the printer using a phone, tablet, or other
device with Wi-Fi (only available when the optional
wireless accessory is installed).
● Wireless: View or change wireless connection
settings (only available when the optional wireless
accessory is installed).
● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection
settings.
● HP Web Services: View information to connect and
print to the printer using HP Web Services.
Touch the information button to access a screen that
provides access to several types of printer information.
Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the
following information:
Control-panel view
5
Table 1-3 Control panel components (continued)
Item Control Description
4
Help button
Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
The status line provides information about the overall
printer status.
5 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the
screen sideways to access more applications.
NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The
administrator can congure which applications appear
and the order in which they appear.
6 Copy button Touch the Copy button to start a copy job.
7 Home-screen page indicator Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in
an application. The current page is highlighted. Swipe the
screen sideways to scroll between pages.
How to use the touchscreen control panel
Perform the following actions to use the printer touchscreen control panel.
Table 1-4 Touchscreen control panel actions
Action Description Example
Touch
Touch an item on the screen to select
that item or open that menu. Also, when
scrolling through menus, briey touch the
screen to stop the scrolling.
Touch the Settings icon to open the
Settings app.
Swipe
Touch the screen and then move your
nger horizontally to scroll the screen
sideways.
Swipe until the Settings app displays.
Scroll
Touch the screen and then move your
nger vertically to scroll the screen up
and down. When scrolling through menus,
briey touch the screen to stop the
scrolling.
Scroll through the Settings app.
6 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Printer specications
Determine the specications for your printer model.
Technical specications ( 5601dn)
Review the technical specications for the printer.
Product number
5601dn - #A29Z5A
Table 1-5 Paper handling specications
Paper handling features 5601dn
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity)
Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity)
HP LaserJet 550 Sheet Paper Tray
*1
Optional
HP LaserJet 3x550 Sheet Paper Feeder
*2
Optional
HP LaserJet 550 Sheet Paper Tray with Storage Stand
*3
Optional
Automatic duplex printing
*1
The printer supports one optional 550 Sheet paper tray on a desktop.
*2
HP LaserJet 3x550 Sheet Paper Feeder has three 550 Sheet paper feeders on a caster stand. It cannot support an additional
550 Sheet paper tray.
*3
HP LaserJet 550 Sheet Paper Tray with Storage Stand has one 550 Sheet paper tray with a storage stand and can support two
additional 550 Sheet paper trays. (Maximum capacity of 550 Sheet paper trays: 3.)
Table 1-6
Connectivity specications
Connectivity features 5601dn
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
Wi-Fi accessory (Wi-Fi Direct and BLE): HP Jetdirect 3000w, 3100w, 3200w Optional
SuperSpeed USB 3.0 rear ports and Hi-Speed USB 2.0 front port for walk-up USB
printing
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) for connecting accessory and third-party devices
Table 1-7 Print specications
Print features 5601dn
Prints up to 52 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-sized paper and 50 ppm on A4
Job storage and private printing
Table 1-8 Mobility specications
Mobility features 5601dn
AirPrint
Printer specications 7
Table 1-9 Copy and scan specications
Copy and scan features 5601dn
ADF copy/scan speed 40 images-per-minute (ipm) single-sided, and 80 ipm double-
sided
50-page document feeder with dual-head scanning for single-pass duplex copying
and scanning
Scan to E-mail, Scan to USB, and Scan to Network Folder options
Table 1-10 Other specications
Other features 5601dn
4 GB DDR4 base memory
16 GB embedded Multi-Media Controller (eMMC)
500 GB Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Optional
512 GB Solid State Drive (SSD) Optional
Color touchscreen control panel
HP Trusted Platform Module for encrypting all data that passes through the printer
Supported operating systems
The following information applies to the printer-specic Windows and HP print drivers for macOS and to
the software installer.
Windows and macOS: Windows and Mac computers and Android and Apple mobile devices are
supported with this printer.
1. Go to support.hp.com.
2. Enter the printer name to get the printer drivers, create an HP account, register the printer, and
connect.
Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to developers.hp.com/hp-linux-imaging-and-printing.
UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
Citrix Ready Kit Certication - Up to Citrix Server 7.18: For more information, go to
citrixready.citrix.com.
Supported operating systems and print drivers
NOTE: HP software and drivers are no longer supported in Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, and
Windows Server 2008 R2.
Table 1-11
Supported operating systems and print drivers
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web)
Windows 11, 64-bit
Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit
The "HP PCL 6" printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating
system as part of the software installation.
8 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Table 1-11 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the web)
Windows Server 2022, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2019, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2016, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the
printer-support website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.
Chrome OS (Chromebook) Chromebook devices are supported for printing using the HP Smart app,
but they are not fully supported for printer setup.
macOS 14 Sonoma, macOS Ventura v13.0, macOS
Monterey v12.0
To install the print driver, download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com.
Follow the steps provided to install the printer software and print driver.
NOTE: For a current list of supported operating systems, go to https://support.hp.com/ for HP's all-
inclusive help for the printer.
NOTE: For driver support for this printer, go to https://support.hp.com/drivers/printers.
Minimum system requirements
Table 1-12 Minimum system requirements for Windows
®
, macOS
®
, and mobile devices (iOS/Android)
Windows 10, Windows 11 (Service
Pack 1)
macOS 14 Sonoma, macOS Ventura
v13.0, macOS Monterey v12.0
Mobile devices, iOS, Android
32-bit or 64-bit
2 GB hard drive
Internet connection
USB port
2 GB hard drive
Internet connection
Router connection not required.
NOTE: For more information, go to
Printers that can use mobile printing
solutions.
Mobile printing solutions
HP offers multiple mobile printing solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device.
To see the full list of mobile printing options available for your printer, go to Printers that can use mobile
printing solutions.
NOTE: Update the printer rmware to ensure all mobile printing capabilities are supported.
● Wi-Fi Direct on wireless models
Mobile printing solutions
9
● AirPrint
● Android Printing
● HP Smart app
Printer dimensions ( 5601dn)
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.
Figure 1-9 Printer dimensions
1
2
3
1
2
3
Table 1-13 Dimensions for the printer
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
1. Width 420 mm (16.5 in) 420 mm (16.5 in)
2. Height 455 mm (17.9 in) 705 mm (27.8 in)
10 Chapter 1 Printer overview
Table 1-13 Dimensions for the printer (continued)
Measurement Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
3. Depth 400 mm (15.7 in) 650 mm (25.6 in)
Weight (with cartridges) 17.1 kg (37.5 lb) 17.1 kg (37.5 lb)
Power consumption, electrical specications, and acoustic emissions
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power
specications.
See www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specications.
Table 1-14 Operating-environment specications
Environment Recommended Storage
Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% relative humidity (RH)
Printer hardware setup and software installation
For basic setup instructions, see the Hardware Installation Guide that came with the printer. For additional
instructions, go to HP support on the web.
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer, which includes the
following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
● Find instructions about how to use the Microsoft Add Printer tool
Power consumption, electrical
specications, and acoustic emissions 11
Paper trays2
Discover how to load and use the paper trays, including how to load special items such as envelopes and
labels.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Use caution when loading the paper trays.
CAUTION: Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.
Do not use paper tray as a step.
All trays must be closed while relocating/moving product.
Keep hands out of paper trays or drawers when closing.
If the printer has a keyboard, close keyboard tray when not in use.
Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
The following information describes how to load paper in Tray 1.
CAUTION: To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
Load Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
This tray holds up to 100 sheets of 75 grams per square meter (20 lb) paper, or 10 envelopes.
View a video of how to load paper in Tray 1
NOTE: Select the correct paper type in the print driver before printing.
12
Chapter 2 Paper trays
1. Open Tray 1.
2. Pull out the tray extension to support the paper, if necessary.
Load Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
13
3. Use the adjustment latch to spread the paper guides outward.
4. Load paper in the tray.
Make sure that the paper ts under the three triangle ll line on the paper guides.
NOTE: The maximum stack height is 10 mm (0.4 in), or approximately 100 sheets of 75 grams per
square meter (20 lb) paper.
14
Chapter 2 Paper trays
5. Using the adjustment latch, adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack, but do
not bend it.
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper orientation
Position paper correctly in Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) to ensure the best print quality.
Table 2-1
Letterhead or pre-printed paper - Portrait
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or pre-printed 1-sided printing Face-up
Bottom top edge leading into the printer.
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper orientation 15
Table 2-1 Letterhead or pre-printed paper - Portrait (continued)
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or pre-printed 2-sided printing Face-down
Top edge leading into the printer.
Letterhead or pre-printed, Pre-
punched
1-sided printing Face-up
Holes toward the right side of the printer.
Letterhead or pre-printed, Pre-
punched
2-sided printing Face-down
Holes toward the right side of the printer.
16 Chapter 2 Paper trays
Table 2-2 Letterhead or pre-printed paper - Landscape
Duplex mode How to load paper
1-sided printing Face-up
Pre-printed image face up and to the right leading into the
printer.
Automatic two-sided printing or with Alternative Letterhead
Mode enabled
Face-down
Pre-printed image face down and to the right leading into the
printer.
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper orientation 17
Table 2-3 Pre-punched paper - Portrait
Duplex mode How to load paper
1-sided or 2-sided printing Punch holes right
Holes toward the right side of the printer.
Load paper to Tray 2-5
Review the following information about loading paper to Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5.
Load Tray 2 or the optional 550-sheet trays
These trays hold up to 550 sheets of 75 grams per square meter (20 lb) paper.
View a video of how to load paper in Tray 2 and the optional trays
NOTE: The procedure to load paper to Tray 2 or the optional 550-sheet trays is the same. Only Tray 2 is
shown here.
1. Open the tray.
NOTE: Do not open any tray while it is in use.
18
Chapter 2 Paper trays
2. Before loading paper, adjust the paper-width guides by holding down the blue lock/unlock toggle
switch on the rear paper-width guide, pinching the blue adjustment latch on the front paper-width
guide, and then sliding the guides to the fully open position.
Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides to the size of the paper being used.
Load Tray 2 or the optional 550-sheet trays
19
3. Load paper into the tray.
4. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
NOTE: To prevent jams, adjust the paper guides to the correct size and do not overll the tray. Be
sure that the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator.
20
Chapter 2 Paper trays
5. Close the tray.
6. The tray conguration message displays on the printer control panel.
7. Select OK to accept the detected type and size, or select Modify to choose a different paper size or
type.
For custom-size paper, specify the X and Y dimensions for the paper when the prompt displays on the
printer control panel.
Tray 2 and the optional 550-sheet trays paper orientation
Position paper correctly in Tray 2 and the optional 550-sheet trays to ensure the best print quality.
Table 2-4
Letterhead or pre-printed paper - Portrait
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or pre-printed 1-sided printing Face-down
Top edge toward the printer.
Face-up, flip short edge
123
Tray 2 and the optional 550-sheet trays paper orientation 21
Table 2-4 Letterhead or pre-printed paper - Portrait (continued)
Paper type Output How to load paper
Letterhead or pre-printed 2-sided printing Face-up
Top edge away from the printer
123
Face-up, flip long edge
Pre-punched 1-sided printing Face-down
Holes toward the right side of the printer
Face-up, flip short edge
Landscape pre-punched
123
Pre-punched 2-sided printing Face-up
Holes toward the left side of the printer
Face-up, flip long edge
Portrait pre-punched
123
22 Chapter 2 Paper trays
Table 2-5 Letterhead or pre-printed paper - Landscape
Duplex mode How to load paper
1-sided printing Face-down
Letterhead to the left of the printer
Face-down, flip short edge
123
Automatic 2-sided printing or with Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
Face-up
Letterhead to the right of the printer
Face-up, flip long edge
12
3
Tray 2 and the optional 550-sheet trays paper orientation 23
Table 2-6 Prepunched paper - Portrait
Duplex mode How to load paper
1 or 2 sided printing Pre-punched to the right
Holes at the right of the tray
Face-up, flip long edge
Portrait pre-punched
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same
way for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode,
load paper as for automatic duplex printing.
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to enable Alternative Letterhead Mode.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
Load and print envelopes
To print on envelopes, use Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) or the optional envelope feeder kit tray.
In addition to the instructions provided in this document, you can view the following video of how to load
envelopes in the printer.
View a video of how to load envelopes in the printer
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) holds up to 10 envelopes.
The Envelope Feeder Kit holds up to 50 envelopes.
24
Chapter 2 Paper trays
Print envelopes
To print envelopes using the manual feed option, follow these steps to select the correct settings in the
print driver, and then load the envelopes into the tray after sending the print job to the printer.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Paper size drop-down list, select the correct size for the envelopes.
5. In the Paper type drop-down list, select Envelope.
6. In the Paper source drop-down list, select Manual feed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box.
8. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button to print the job.
Tray 1 envelope orientation
When loading envelopes, load them according to the information in the following table.
Print envelopes
25
Table 2-7 Envelope orientation
Tray How to load
Tray 1 Face-up
Short, postage-end leading into the printer
Envelope Feeder Kit envelope orientation
When loading envelopes, load them according to the information in the following table.
Table 2-8
Envelope orientation
Envelope feeder kit How to load
Envelope Feeder Kit Face-down
Short, postage-end leading into the printer
Load and print labels
To print on sheets of labels, use only Tray 1 (multipurpose tray), Tray 2, Tray 3 and the optional 550-sheet
trays.
Manually feed labels
Use the manual feed mode for Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) to print sheets of labels.
26
Chapter 2 Paper trays
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Paper size drop-down list, select the correct size for the sheets of labels.
5. In the Paper type drop-down list, select Labels.
6. In the Paper source drop-down list, select Manual feed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box.
8. In the Print dialog box, click the Print button to print the job.
Label orientation
Labels need to be loaded in a specic manner in order to print correctly.
Table 2-9 Label orientation
Tray How to load labels
Tray 1 Face-down
Bottom edge leading into the printer
Label orientation 27
Supplies, accessories, and parts3
Order supplies or accessories, replace the toner cartridges, or remove and replace another part.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Order supplies, accessories, and parts
Find out how to obtain replacement supplies, accessories, and parts for the printer.
Ordering
Order parts, supplies, or accessories through one of the following channels.
Table 3-1
Ordering options
Ordering option Ordering information
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter
the printer IP address or host name in the address/URL eld.
The EWS contains a link to the HP website, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Supplies
Find information about the supplies that are available for your printer.
NOTE: Cartridges are for distribution and use with their designated product only; they will not work with
other printer models.
28
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Table 3-2 Supplies
Item Cartridge number Part number
HP 159A Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
159A W1590A
HP 159X Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
159X W1590X
HP 159Y Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
159Y W1590Y
Accessories
Find information about the accessories that are available for your printer.
Table 3-3 Accessories
Description Part number
HP LaserJet 550 Sheet Paper Tray 6C7M6A
HP LaserJet 3x550 Sheet Paper Feeder B01KLA
HP LaserJet 550 Sheet Paper Tray with Storage Stand B01KTA
HP LaserJet Envelope Feeder Kit B01KSA
HP MFP Analog Fax 702 Accessory 1M0Q0A
HP MFP Analog Fax 703 Accessory (Korea Only) 1M0Q1A
SSD 256GB Kit SED/TAA M.2 NVMe, Universal Kit 766R7A
HP LaserJet 512GB M.2 2280 NVMe CCC/FIPS/TAA Solid State
Drive
B18J1A
HP Removable Hard Drive Enclosure 2NR12A
HP Accessibility Kit 2TD64A
HP Printing Voice Assistant 478C2A
HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) B5L31A
HP Jetdirect LAN Accessory Module 8FP31A
HP Legic Card USB Reader 4QL32A
HP USB Universal Card Reader X3D03A
HP Internal USB Expansion Kit 4XN67A
HP LaserJet Workow Accelerator Card 1M0Q5A
Customer self-repair parts
Customer self-repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.
NOTE: More information about the CSR program and benets can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-
support.
Accessories
29
Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-
authorized service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number,
serial number (found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.
● Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by the customer unless the customer
is willing to pay HP service personnel to perform the repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot
support is not provided under the HP printer warranty.
● Parts listed as Optional self-replacement can be installed by HP service personnel at your request for
no additional charge during the printer warranty period.
Table 3-4 Customer self-repair (CSR) parts
Item Description Self-replacement
options
Part number
550-sheet paper input tray Replacement cassette for Tray 2 Mandatory RM2-3615-000CN
HP Color LaserJet 550 sheet Paper
Tray
550-sheet paper feeder (optional
Tray 3)
Mandatory 6QN57A
Congure the HP toner-supply-protection settings
A network administrator can congure the toner-supply-protection settings using the printer control panel
or the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Introduction
Use HP Cartridge Policy and Supply Protection to control which cartridges are installed in the printer and
protect the cartridges that are installed from theft.
In HP Web Jetadmin, the settings are located under the Device Management pane in the following menu
chain: Cong > Supplies > Cartridge Policy or Supply Protection.
● Cartridge Policy: This feature protects the printer from counterfeit toner cartridges by allowing only
genuine HP cartridges to be used with the printer. Using genuine HP cartridges ensures the best
possible print quality. When someone installs a cartridge that is not a genuine HP cartridge, the printer
control panel displays a message that the cartridge is unauthorized and it provides information
explaining how to proceed.
● Supply Protection: This feature permanently associates toner cartridges with a specic printer,
or eet of printers, so they cannot be used in other printers. Protecting cartridges protects your
investment. When this feature is enabled, if someone attempts to transfer a protected cartridge
from the original printer into an unauthorized printer, that printer will not print with the protected
cartridge. The printer control panel displays a message that the cartridge is protected, and it provides
information explaining how to proceed.
CAUTION: After enabling supply protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed
in the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge,
disable the feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature off does not turn off protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
30
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature
The Cartridge Policy feature can be enabled or disabled using the control panel or the Embedded Web
Server (EWS).
NOTE: Enabling or disabling this feature might require entering an administrator password.
Check with your administrator to determine if an administrator password has been set. EWS passwords
cannot be recovered.
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Policy feature. This allows
only genuine HP cartridges to be used with the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Policy
3. Select Authorized HP.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Policy feature. This
removes the restriction that only genuine HP cartridges can be used.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Policy
3. Select Off.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Policy feature. This allows only genuine
HP cartridges to be used with the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature
31
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
The EWS opens.
2. On the EWS home page, click the Supplies tab.
3. In the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Authorized HP from the Cartridge Policy drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Policy feature. This removes the
restriction that only genuine HP cartridges can be used.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
The EWS opens.
2. On the EWS home page, click the Supplies tab.
3. In the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Off from the Cartridge Policy drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Troubleshoot Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
Review the recommended actions for Cartridge Policy error messages.
32
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Table 3-5 Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
Error message Description Recommended action
10.0X.30 Unauthorized <Color>
Cartridge
The administrator has congured this
printer to use only genuine HP supplies
that are still under warranty. The
cartridge must be replaced to continue
printing.
Replace the cartridge with a genuine HP
toner cartridge.
If you believe you purchased a
genuine HP supply, visit www.hp.com/go/
anticounterfeit to determine if the toner
cartridge is a genuine HP cartridge, and
learn what to do if it is not a genuine HP
cartridge.
Enable or disable the Supply Protection feature
The Supply Protection feature can be enabled or disabled using the control panel or the Embedded Web
Server (EWS).
NOTE: Enabling or disabling this feature might require entering an administrator password.
Check with your administrator to determine if an administrator password has been set. EWS passwords
cannot be recovered.
Use the printer control panel to enable the Supply Protection feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can enable the Supply Protection feature. This
protects the cartridges associated with the printer from being stolen and used in other printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Supply Protection
3. Select Protect supplies.
4. When the printer prompts to conrm, select Continue to enable the feature.
CAUTION: After enabling supply protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed
in the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge,
disable the feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature off does not turn off protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Supply Protection feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can disable the Supply Protection feature. This
removes protection for any new cartridges installed in the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
Enable or disable the Supply Protection feature
33
b. Supply Protection
3. Select Off.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Supply Protection feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can enable the Supply Protection feature. This protects the
cartridges associated with the printer from being stolen and used in other printers.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
The EWS opens.
2. On the EWS home page, click the Supplies tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Protect supplies from the Supply Protection drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
CAUTION: After enabling supply protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed
in the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge,
disable the feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature off does not turn off protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Supply Protection feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can disable the Supply Protection feature. This removes protection
for any new cartridges installed in the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
34
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
The EWS opens.
2. On the EWS home page, click the Supplies tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Off from the Supply Protection drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Troubleshoot Supply Protection control panel error messages
Review the recommended actions for Supply Protection error messages.
Table 3-6 Supply Protection control panel error messages
Error message Description Recommended action
10.0X.57 Protected <Color>
Cartridge
The cartridge can only be used in the printer or eet
of printers that initially protected it using HP Supply
Protection.
The Supply Protection feature allows an administrator
to restrict cartridges to work in only one printer or
eet of printers. The cartridge must be replaced to
continue printing.
Replace the cartridge with a new
toner cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge
To ensure optimal print quality, replace the toner cartridge when the printer alerts you that the toner is low
or empty.
Toner cartridge information
Review details about ordering replacement toner cartridges.
The printer indicates when the toner-cartridge level is low and very low. The actual toner cartridge life
remaining can vary. Consider having a replacement cartridge available to install when print quality is no
longer acceptable.
Continue printing with the current cartridge until redistributing the toner no longer yields acceptable print
quality. To redistribute the toner, remove the toner cartridge from the printer and gently rock the cartridge
back and forth end to end. For graphical representation, see the cartridge replacement instructions.
Reinsert the toner cartridge into the printer, and then close the cover.
To purchase cartridges or check cartridge compatibility for the printer, go to
https://learn-about-supplies.ext.hp.com/. Scroll to the bottom of the page and verify that the country/region
is correct.
Troubleshoot Supply Protection control panel error messages
35
Table 3-7
Item Cartridge number Part number
HP 159A Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
159A W1590A
HP 159X Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
159X W1590X
HP 159Y Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
159Y W1590Y
NOTE: High-yield toner cartridges contain more toner than standard cartridges for increased page
yield. For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/toneryield.
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it is time to replace it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few
minutes. Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an
extended period of time.
The following illustration shows the toner cartridge components.
Figure 3-1 Toner cartridge components
1
2
36
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Table 3-8 Toner cartridge components
Callout Description
1 Imaging drum
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints can cause print-quality problems.
2 Memory chip
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water.
Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used toner cartridges is in the toner cartridge box or at
www.hp.com/hprecycle.
Remove and replace the toner cartridge
Follow these steps to replace the toner cartridge.
View a video of how to replace a toner cartridge
1. Press the toner cartridge door release button on the left panel to open the toner cartridge door.
Remove and replace the toner cartridge
37
2. Grasp the handle of the toner cartridge and then pull the toner cartridge up and out to remove it from
the printer.
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its package. Save all packaging for recycling the used toner
cartridge.
4. Hold the new toner cartridge at both ends and rock it back and forth, end to end, to distribute the
toner evenly inside the cartridge.
38
Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
5. Align the new toner cartridge with its slot and insert it into the printer until it is rmly seated.
6. Close the toner cartridge door.
7. Pack the used toner cartridge into the box that the new toner cartridge came in. See the enclosed
recycling guide for information about recycling.
In the U.S. and Canada, a pre-paid shipping label is included in the box. In other countries/regions, go
to www.hp.com/hprecycle to print a pre-paid shipping label.
Adhere the pre-paid shipping label to the box, and return the used cartridge to HP for recycling.
Remove and replace the toner cartridge
39
40 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Print4
Print using the software, or print from a mobile device or USB ash drive.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Print tasks (Windows)
Learn about common printing tasks for Windows users.
How to print (Windows)
Use the Print option from a software application to select the printer and basic options for your print job.
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for Windows.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers. To change settings, click the Printer Properties or
Preferences button to open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
NOTE: For more information, click the Help (?) button in the print driver.
3. Click the tabs in the print driver to congure the available options. For example, set the paper
orientation on the Finishing tab, and set the paper source, paper type, paper size, and quality
settings on the Paper/Quality tab.
4. Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box. Select the number of copies to print from this
screen.
5. Click the Print button to print the job.
Print
41
Automatically print on both sides (Windows)
If your printer has an automatic duplexer installed, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper.
Use a paper size and type supported by the duplexer.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Printer Properties or Preferences
button to open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select Print on both sides. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.
5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
Manually print on both sides (Windows)
Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that
the duplexer does not support.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Printer Properties or Preferences
button to open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select Print on both sides (manually), and then click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.
5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the rst side of the job.
6. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin, and place it in Tray 1.
7. If prompted, select the appropriate control panel button to continue.
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can select an option to print
multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. For example, you might want to do this if you are printing a very
large document and want to save paper.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Printer Properties or Preferences
button to open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
42
Chapter 4 Print
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop-down.
5. Select the correct Print page borders, Page order, and Orientation options. Click OK to close the
Document Properties dialog.
6. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
Select the paper type (Windows)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can set the paper type you are
using for your print job. For example, if your default paper type is Letter, but you are using a different paper
type for a print job, select that specic paper type.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Printer Properties or Preferences
button to open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. Select the paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.
5. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
If the tray needs to be congured, a tray conguration message displays on the printer control panel.
6. Load the tray with the specied type and size of paper, and then close the tray.
7. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a
different paper size or type.
8. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.
Additional print tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common printing tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
Instructions are available for print tasks, such as the following:
● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets
● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size
● Select the page orientation
● Create a booklet
● Scale a document to t a specic paper size
Select the paper type (Windows)
43
● Print the rst or last pages of the document on different paper
● Print watermarks on a document
Print tasks (macOS)
Print using the HP printing software for macOS, including how to print on both sides or print multiple pages
per sheet.
How to print (macOS)
Use the Print option from a software application to select the printer and basic options for your print job.
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for macOS.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then select other menus to adjust the print settings.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.
4. Click the Print button.
Automatically print on both sides (macOS)
If your printer has an automatic duplexer installed, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper.
Use a paper size and type supported by the duplexer.
NOTE: This information applies to printers that include an automatic duplexer.
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint
®
.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.
macOS 12.0 Monterey and later: Click Show Details, click Two-Sided, and then click the Layout
menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.
4. Select a binding option from the Two-Sided drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
Manually print on both sides (macOS)
Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that
the duplexer does not support.
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint.
44
Chapter 4 Print
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Manual Duplex menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.
4. Click the Manual Duplex box, and select a binding option.
5. Click the Print button.
6. Go to the printer and remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1.
7. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin and place it with the printed-side facing down in the
input tray.
8. If prompted, touch the appropriate control panel button to continue.
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can select an option to print
multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. For example, you might want to do this if you are printing a very
large document and want to save paper.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.
4. From the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to print on each
sheet.
5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
7. Click the Print button.
Select the paper type (macOS)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can set the paper type you are
using for your print job. For example, if your default paper type is Letter, but you are using a different paper
type for a print job, select that specic paper type.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Media & Quality menu or the Paper/
Quality menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for different software programs.
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)
45
4. Select from the Media & Quality or Paper/Quality options.
NOTE: This list contains the master set of options available. Some options are not available on all
printers.
● Media Type: Select the option for the type of paper for the print job.
● Print Quality or Quality: Select the resolution level for the print job.
● Edge-To-Edge Printing: Select this option to print close to the paper edges.
5. Click the Print button.
Additional print tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common printing tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
Instructions are available for print tasks, such as the following:
● Create and use printing shortcuts or presets
● Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size
● Select the page orientation
● Create a booklet
● Scale a document to t a specic paper size
● Print the rst or last pages of the document on different paper
● Print watermarks on a document
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately
Store print jobs in the printer memory for printing at a later time.
Introduction
The following information provides procedures for creating and printing documents that are stored on the
USB ash drive. These jobs can be printed at a later time or printed privately.
Create a stored job (Windows)
Store jobs on the USB ash drive for private or delayed printing.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then select Printer Properties or Preferences.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for different software programs.
For the HP PCL 6 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Job Storage tab.
46
Chapter 4 Print
4. Select a Job Storage Mode option:
● Proof and Hold: Print and proof one copy of a job, and then print more copies.
● Personal Job: The job does not print until you request it at the printer control panel. For this
job-storage mode, you can select one of the Make Job Private/Secure options. If you assign a
personal identication number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control
panel. If you encrypt the job, you must provide the required password at the control panel. The
print job is deleted from memory after it prints and is lost if the printer loses power.
● Quick Copy: Print the requested number of copies of a job and store a copy of the job in the
printer memory so you can print it again later.
● Stored Job: Store a job on the printer and allow other users to print the job at any time. For this
job-storage mode, you can select one of the Make Job Private/Secure options. If you assign
a personal identication number (PIN) to the job, the person who prints the job must provide
the required PIN at the control panel. If you encrypt the job, the person who prints the job must
provide the required password at the control panel.
5. To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or
the job name.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name:
● Use Job Name + (1-99): Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
● Replace Existing File: Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
6. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the
Print button to print the job.
Create a stored job (macOS)
Store jobs on the USB ash drive for private or delayed printing.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Job Storage menu.
NOTE: If the Job Storage menu is not showing, follow the instructions in the "Disable or enable job
storage feature" section to activate the menu.
4. In the Mode drop-down list, select the type of stored job.
● Proof and Hold: Print and proof one copy of a job, and then print more copies. The rst copy
prints immediately. Printing of the subsequent copies must be initiated from the device's front
control panel. For example, if 10 copies are sent, one copy prints immediately, and the other nine
copies will print when the job is retrieved. The job is deleted after all copies are printed.
● Personal Job: The job does not print until someone requests it at the printer control panel. If the
job has a personal identication number (PIN), provide the required PIN at the control panel. The
print job is deleted from memory after it prints.
● Quick Copy: Print the requested number of copies of a job and store a copy of the job in the
printer memory to print it again later. The job is deleted manually or by the job retention schedule.
Create a stored job (macOS)
47
● Stored Job: Store a job on the printer and allow other users to print the job at any time. If the
job has a personal identication number (PIN), the person who prints the job must provide the
required PIN at the control panel. The job is deleted manually or by the job retention schedule.
5. To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or
the job name.
NOTE: macOS 12.0 Monterey and above: The print driver no longer includes the Custom button.
Use the options below the Mode drop-down list to set up the saved job.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.
● Use Job Name + (1-99): Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
● Replace Existing File: Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
6. If you selected the Stored Job or Personal Job option in the Mode drop-down list, you can protect
the job with a PIN. Type a 4-digit number in the Use PIN to Print eld. When other people attempt to
print this job, the printer prompts them to enter this PIN.
7. Click the Print button to process the job.
Print a stored job
Use the following procedure to print a job that is stored in the printer memory.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select
the Print icon.
2. Select Print from Job Storage.
3. Select the name of the folder where the job is stored, or select Choose to see the folder list.
4. Select the name of the job. If the job is private or encrypted, enter the PIN or password.
5. To adjust the number of copies, select the number of copies eld. Use the keypad to enter the number
of copies to print.
6. Select Start or Print to print the job.
Delete a stored job
You can delete documents that have been saved to the printer when they are no longer needed. You can
also adjust the maximum number of jobs for the printer to store.
Delete a job that is stored on the printer
Use the control panel to delete a job that is stored in the printer memory.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select
the Print icon.
2. Select Print from Job Storage.
3. Select the name of the folder where the job is stored or select Choose to see the folder list.
4. Select the name of the job. If the job is private or encrypted, enter the PIN or password.
5. Select the Trash button to delete the job.
48
Chapter 4 Print
Change the job storage limit
When a new job is stored in the printer memory, the printer overwrites any previous jobs with the same
user and job name. If a job is not already stored under the same user and job name, and the printer needs
additional space, the printer might delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest.
To change the number of jobs that the printer can store, complete the following procedure:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Stored Jobs
c. Temporary Job Storage Limit
3. Use the keypad to enter the number of jobs that the printer stores.
4. Select OK or Done to save the setting.
Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes
Printing jobs sent from drivers on the client (e.g., PC) may send personally identiable information to HP’s
Printing and Imaging devices. This information may include, but is not limited to, user name and client
name from which the job originated that may be used for job accounting purposes, as determined by the
Administrator of the printing device. This same information may also be stored with the job on the mass
storage device (e.g., disk drive) of the printing device when using the job storage feature.
Mobile printing
Mobile printing solutions enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet, smartphone, or other
mobile device.
Mobile printing solutions
Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.
HP offers multiple mobile printing solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to Wireless
printing from a laptop, phone, or tablet.
● Wi-Fi Direct
● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices
● AirPrint
● Android Printing
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing
HP provides Wi-Fi Direct Print, Near Field Communication (NFC), and Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) printing
for printers with a supported HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accessory. This is an optional
accessory.
Change the job storage limit
49
These features enable Wi-Fi capable (mobile) devices to make a wireless network connection directly to
the printer without using a wireless router.
The printer does not need to be connected to the network for this mobile walk-up printing to work.
Use Wi-Fi Direct Print to print wirelessly from the following devices:
● iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch using Apple AirPrint
● Android mobile devices using the Android embedded print solution
For more information on wireless printing, go to www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
NFC, BLE, and Wi-Fi Direct Print capabilities can be enabled or disabled from the printer control panel.
Enable wireless printing
To print wirelessly from mobile devices, Wi-Fi Direct must be turned on.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Wi-Fi Direct
c. Status
3. Select On, and then select OK to enable wireless printing.
Change the Wi-Fi Direct name
Change the printer Wi-Fi Direct name using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
NOTE: In environments where more than one model of the same printer is installed, it might be helpful
to provide each printer a unique Wi-Fi Direct Name for easier printer identication for HP Wi-Fi Direct
printing. The Wireless network names, e.g., Wireless, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are available on the Information
screen by selecting the Information icon , and then selecting the Wi-Fi Direct icon .
Complete the following procedure to change the printer Wi-Fi Direct name:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Wi-Fi Direct
c. Wi-Fi Direct Name
3. Use the keypad to change the name in the Wi-Fi Direct Name text eld, and then select OK.
AirPrint
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS and from Mac computers running macOS 10.7
Lion and newer.
50
Chapter 4 Print
Use AirPrint to print directly to the printer from an iPad, iPhone (3GS or later), or iPod touch (third
generation or later) in the following mobile applications:
● Mail
● Photos
● Safari
● iBooks
● Select third-party applications
To use AirPrint, the printer must be connected to the same network (sub-net) as the Apple device. For
more information about using AirPrint and about which HP printers are compatible with AirPrint, go to
http://www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
NOTE: Before using AirPrint with a USB connection, verify the version number. AirPrint versions 1.3 and
earlier do not support USB connections.
Android embedded printing
HP's built-in print solution for Android and Kindle enables mobile devices to automatically nd and print to
HP printers that are either on a network or within wireless range for Wi-Fi Direct printing.
The print solution is built into many versions of the operating system.
NOTE: If printing is not available on your device, go to the Google Play > Android apps and install the HP
Print Service Plugin.
For more information on how to use Android embedded printing and which Android devices are supported,
go to http://www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
Print from a USB
ash drive
This printer features easy-access USB printing to print les without a computer.
The printer accepts standard USB ash drives in the USB port near the control panel. It supports the
following types of les:
● .pdf
● .prn
● .pcl
● .ps
● .cht
Enable the USB port for printing
The USB port is disabled by default. Before using this feature, enable the USB port.
Use one of the following methods to enable the port:
Android embedded printing
51
Method one: Enable the USB port from the printer control panel
Use the printer control panel to enable the USB port for printing.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Enable Print from USB Drive
3. Select Enabled.
Method two: Enable the USB port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected
printers only)
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable the USB port for printing.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address exactly as it displays on the printer
control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
3. Select the Copy/Print tab for MFP models or the Print tab for SFP models.
4. In the left menu, select Print from USB Drive Settings.
5. Select Enable Print from USB Drive.
6. Click Apply.
Print USB documents
Print documents from a USB ash drive.
1. Insert the USB ash drive into the easy-access USB port.
NOTE: The port might be covered. For some printers, the cover ips open. For other printers, pull the
cover straight out to remove it.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select
the Print icon.
3. Select Print from USB.
4. Select Choose, select the name of the document to print, and then select Select.
NOTE: The document might be in a folder. Open folders as necessary.
52
Chapter 4 Print
5. To adjust the number of copies, touch the box to the left of the Print button, and then select the
number of copies from the keypad that opens. To close the keypad, select the Close button.
6. Select Print to print the document.
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired)
Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port for wired USB printing. The port is located in the interface ports area
and is disabled by default.
Use one of the following methods to enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port. Once the port is enabled, install
the product software in order to print using this port.
Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel
menus
Use the control panel to enable the port.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Enable Device USB
3. Select the Enabled option.
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web
Server (network-connected printers only)
Use the HP EWS to enable the port.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. On the printer control panel, press the Information button, and then use the arrow keys to
select the Ethernet menu. Press the OK button to open the menu and display the IP address
or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS
opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
2. Select the Security tab.
3. On the left side of the screen, select General Security.
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired)
53
4. Scroll down to the Hardware Ports and select the check box to enable both of the items:
● Enable Device USB
● Enable Host USB plug and play
5. Click Apply.
54 Chapter 4 Print
Copy5
Make copies with the printer, learn how to copy a two-sided document, and locate additional copy tasks on
the web.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Make a copy
Copy a document or picture from the scanner glass or automatic document feeder.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select
the Copy icon.
3. To select the number of copies, touch the box next to Copy, use the keypad to enter the number of
copies, and then touch the close keypad button .
4. Touch Options, and then select your preferred copy settings.
5. Select Optimize Text/Picture to optimize for the type of image being copied: text, graphics, or photos.
Select one of the predened options.
6. Set options marked with a yellow triangle before using the preview feature.
NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are
summarized in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and
start over.
Using the preview feature is optional.
Copy
55
7. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on
the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 5-1 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Table 5-2 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
56 Chapter 5 Copy
Table 5-2 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
8. When the document is ready, touch Copy to begin copying.
Copy on both sides (duplex)
Copy or print on both sides of the paper.
1. Place the document face up in the document feeder and adjust the paper guides to t the size of the
document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Copy icon.
3. In the Copy pane, touch Sides, and then select the option that describes the original document:
● Use 1-sided for originals that are printed on one side of the page.
● Use 2-sided (book-style) for originals that ip on the right/left edge of the page, like books. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the long edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the
output ips on the short edge of the page.
● Use 2-sided (ip-style) for originals that ip on the top/bottom edge of the page, like calendars. If
the image is portrait, the output ips on the short edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the
output ips on the long edge of the page.
4. Select Output Sides, and then select one of these options:
● 1-sided: The output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing,
the output will be 2-sided book-style.
● 2-sided (book-style): The output will ip on the right/left edge of the page, like a book. If the image
is portrait, the output ips on the long edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output ips
on the short edge of the page.
● 2-sided (ip-style): The output will ip on the top/bottom edge of the page, like a calendar. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the short edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the
output ips on the long edge of the page.
Copy on both sides (duplex)
57
5. To set any other options required, touch Options to make changes before using the preview feature.
NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are
summarized in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and
start over.
Using the preview feature is optional.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on
the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 5-3 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
58 Chapter 5 Copy
Table 5-3 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
7. When the document is ready, touch Copy to begin copying.
Additional copy tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common copy tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
Instructions are available for copy tasks, such as the following:
● Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents
● Copy mixed-size documents
● Copy or scan both sides of an identication card
● Copy or scan a document into a booklet format
Additional copy tasks
59
Scan6
Scan using the software, or scan directly to email, a USB ash drive, a network folder, or another
destination.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Set up Scan to Email
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
Introduction
To use this scan feature, the printer must be connected to a network; however, the feature is not available
until it has been congured. There are two methods for conguring Scan to Email, the Scan to Email
Setup Wizard for basic and Email Setup for advanced.
Use the following information to set up the Scan to Email feature.
Before you begin
To set up the Scan to Email feature, the printer must have an active network connection.
Administrators need the following information before beginning the conguration process.
● Administrative access to the printer
● DNS sufx (e.g., companyname.com)
60
Chapter 6 Scan
● SMTP server (e.g., smtp.mycompany.com)
NOTE: If you do not know the SMTP server name, SMTP port number, or authentication information,
contact the email/Internet service provider or system administrator for the information. SMTP server
names and port names are typically found by doing an Internet search. For example, use terms like
"Gmail smtp server name" or "Yahoo smtp server name" to search.
● SMTP server authentication requirements for outgoing email messages, including the user name and
password used for authentication, if applicable.
NOTE: Consult your email service provider's documentation for information on digital sending limits for
your email account. Some providers may temporarily lock your account if you exceed your sending limit.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
NOTE: The gure in this topic shows an EWS screen for a color printer. However, the procedure below is
valid for both color and mono printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Step two:
Congure the Network Identication settings
Congure advanced setting for network identication.
NOTE: Conguring email setup on the Networking tab is an advanced process and might require the
assistance of a system administrator.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
61
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.
NOTE: For conguring the network settings for use with Ofce 365, Step ve: Set up Send to Email
to use Ofce 365 Outlook (optional) on page 71
2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings. A username/password might be required to access
the Network Identication tab of the EWS.
3. On the TCP/IP Settings dialog, click the Network Identication tab.
4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Sufx area, verify that the DNS sufx for the
email client being used is listed. DNS sufxes have this format: companyname.com, gmail.com, etc.
NOTE: If the Domain Name sufx is not set up, use the IP address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
Step three:
Congure the Send to Email feature
The two options for conguring Send to Email are the Email Setup Wizard for basic conguration and
Email Setup for advanced conguration. Use the following options to congure the Send to Email feature:
Method one: Basic
conguration using the Email Setup Wizard
Perform basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard.
This option opens the Email Setup Wizard in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for basic conguration.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards.
62
Chapter 6 Scan
3. In the Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards dialog, click the Email Setup link.
NOTE: If a message displays indicating that the Scan to Email feature is disabled, click Continue to
proceed with the conguration and enable the Scan to Email feature upon completion.
4. On the Congure Email Servers (SMTP) dialog, select one of the following options and complete the
steps:
● Option one: Use a server already in use by Email.
Select Use a server already in use by Email, and then click Next.
● Option two: Search the network for the outgoing email server.
This option nds outgoing SMTP servers inside your rewall only.
a. Select Search network for outgoing email server, and then click Next.
b. Select the appropriate server from the Congure Email Server (SMTP) list, and then click
Next.
c. Select the option that describes the server’s authentication requirements:
– Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require
authentication, and then click Next.
-OR-
– Server requires authentication: From the drop-down list, select an authentication
option:
○ Select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and
then click Next.
-OR-
Method one: Basic
conguration using the Email Setup Wizard 63
○ Select Always use these credentials, enter the User name and Password, and
then click Next.
● Option three: Add the SMTP server.
a. Select Add SMTP server.
b. Enter the Server Name and Port Number, and then click Next.
NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.
NOTE: If you are using a hosted SMTP service such as Gmail, verify the SMTP address,
port number, and SSL settings from the service provider’s website or other sources.
Typically, for Gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465, and the SSL
should be enabled.
Please refer to online sources to conrm these server settings are current and valid at the
time of conguration.
c. Select the appropriate server authentication option:
– Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require
authentication, and then click Next.
-OR-
– Server requires authentication: Select an option from the Server requires
authentication drop-down list:
○ Select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and
then click Next.
-OR-
○ Select Always use these credentials, enter the User name and Password, and
then click Next.
5. On the Congure Email Settings dialog, enter the following information about the sender’s email
address, and then click Next.
NOTE: When setting up the From, Subject, and Message elds, if the User editable check box is
unchecked, users will not be able to edit those elds at the printer control panel when sending an
email.
Table 6-1
Send email settings
Option Description
From
(Required)
Select one of the following options from the From drop-down list:
● User’s address (sign-in required)
● Default From: Enter a default email address and display name in the Default From
Email Address and Default Display Name elds
NOTE: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the
default email address.
NOTE: Congure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This
prevents users from sending an email from an address that is not their own.
64 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-1 Send email settings (continued)
Option Description
Subject
(Optional)
Provide a default subject line for the email messages.
Message
(Optional)
Create a custom message.
To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear the User editable check
box for Message.
6. In the Congure File Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences, and then click Next.
Table 6-2 Scan settings
Option Description
File Type Select the default le type for the scanned document:
● PDF
● JPEG
● TIFF
●
MTIFF
●
XPS
● PDF/A
HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP printers or MFP printers that are connected to a digital
send software (DSS) server also support the following OCR le types:
● Text (OCR)
● Unicode Text (OCR)
● RTF (OCR)
● Searchable PDF (OCR)
● Searchable PDF/A (OCR)
●
HTML (OCR)
●
CSV (OCR)
Color/Black
Select the default color setting for the scanned document:
● Color
● Black
● Black/Gray
●
Automatically detect
Quality and File Size Select the default output quality for the scanned document:
● Low (small le)
● Medium
● High (large le)
Method one: Basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard 65
Table 6-2 Scan settings (continued)
Option Description
Resolution Select the default scan resolution for the scanned document:
● 75 dpi
● 150 dpi
● 200 dpi
●
300 dpi
●
400 dpi
● 600 dpi
7. Review the Summary area, and then click Finish to complete the setup.
Method two: Advanced
conguration using the Email Setup
Use the following steps for advanced
conguration using the E-mail Setup dialog in the EWS.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send, expand the Email Setup menu in the left
navigation pane, and then click Default Job Options.
The Default Job Options page displays the Basic Settings for Scan to Email setup. To access
additional settings, click the Advanced Settings button at the bottom of the page. To switch back to
basic settings, click the Basic Settings button.
NOTE: This procedure covers the steps for Basic Settings rst and then the steps for Advanced
Settings.
Figure 6-1 Location of Advanced Settings button
66
Chapter 6 Scan
2. On the Default Job Options page, select the Enable Scan to Email check box. If this check box is not
selected, the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
3. In the Outgoing Email Servers (SMTP) area, complete the steps for one of the following options:
● Select one of the displayed servers.
● Click Add to start the SMTP wizard.
a. In the SMTP wizard, select one of the following options:
– Option one: I know my SMTP server address or host name: Enter the address of an
SMTP server, and then click Next
– Option two: If you do not know the address of the SMTP server, select Search network
for outgoing email server, and then click Next. Select the server, and then click Next.
NOTE: If an SMTP server was already created for another printer function, the Use a
server already in use by another function option displays. Select this option, and then
congure it to be used for the email function.
b. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, set the
options to use, and then click Next.
– Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5
megabytes (MB). These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split
emails if larger than (MB).
– In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed. However, when
using the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol option, port 587 must be used.
– If you are using Google™ Gmail for email service, select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol
check box. Typically, for gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465,
and the SSL should be enabled. Refer to online sources to conrm these server
settings are current and valid at the time of conguration.
Method two: Advanced
conguration using the Email Setup 67
c. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, select the option that describes the
server’s authentication requirements:
– Server does not require authentication, and then click Next.
– Server requires authentication
○ From the drop-down box, select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In
at the control panel, and then click Next.
○ From the drop-down box, select Always use these credentials, enter the
Username and Password, and then click Next.
NOTE: If using a signed-in user's credentials, set email to require sign in by the user on the
printer control panel. Deny device guest access to email by clearing the check box for email
in the Device Guest column in the Sign in and Permission Policies area on the Access
Control dialog of the Security tab. The icon in the check box changes from a check mark to
a lock.
d. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this
SMTP server, and then click the Next button.
If the server requires authentication, a user name and password for sending automatic
alerts and reports from the printer will be required.
e. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send test email to:
eld, and then click Test.
f. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing
email server set up.
4. In the Address and Message Field Control area, enter a From: setting and any of the other optional
settings.
Table 6-3
Address and Message Field Control (Basic Settings)
Feature Description
User editable To use the Default From address and Default Display Name for all emails sent from this
printer (unless a user is signed in), clear the User editable check box.
When setting up the address elds, if the User editable check box is cleared, users will
not be able to edit those elds at the printer control panel when sending an email. For
send-to-me functionality, clear the User editable check boxes for all of the address elds,
including the From:, To:, CC:, and BCC: elds, and then set that user's send email From: their
own email address and To: their own email address.
Default From: and Default
Display Name:
Provide an email address and name to use for the From: address for the email message.
NOTE: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default email
address.
NOTE: Congure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This prevents
users from sending an email from an address that is not their own.
Subject: Provide a default subject line for the email messages.
Message: Create a custom message. To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear or
do not select the User editable check box for Message:.
68 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-4 Address and Message Field Control (Advanced Settings - optional)
Feature Description
Address Field Restrictions Specify whether users must select an email address from an address book or whether
users are allowed to enter in an email address manually.
CAUTION: If Users must select from address book is selected, and any of the address
elds are also set as User editable, changes to those editable elds also change the
corresponding values in the address book.
To prevent users from changing contacts in the Address Book at the printer control panel,
go to the Access Control page on the Security tab, and deny Device Guest access to
address book modications.
Allow invalid email address
formats
Select to allow an invalid email address format.
To: Provide a To (recipient) email address for emails.
CC: Provide a CC email address for emails.
BCC: Provide a BCC email address for emails.
5. In the File Settings area, set the default le settings preferences.
Table 6-5 File Settings (Basic Settings)
Feature Description
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they
show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but
the le size is smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-
quality images, and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only (color printers
only).
Table 6-6 File settings (Advanced Settings - optional)
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Sufx Set the default le name sufx used for les saved to a network folder.
Duplicate lename sufx default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job
has just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of
multiple les.
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup 69
Table 6-6 File settings (Advanced Settings - optional) (continued)
Feature Description
High Compression (smaller
le)
Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However,
the scanning process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal
compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be
specied as part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The
user will be prompted to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set
prior to pressing start.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum
number of pages per le.
6. Click the Advanced Settings button to display the following settings:
● Signing and Encryption
● Notication (job notication)
● Scan Settings
7. In the Signing and Encryption area, set the signing and encryption preferences.
Table 6-7
Signing and Encryption settings
Feature Description
Signing Select whether to sign the email with a security certicate.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Hashing Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for signing the certicate.
Encryption Select whether to encrypt the email.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Encryption Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for encrypting the email.
Attribute for Recipient
Public Key
Enter which attribute to use to retrieve the recipient’s public key certicate from LDAP.
Use the recipient public
key certicate to verify the
recipient
Select this setting to use the recipient’s public key certicate to verify the recipient.
8. In the Notication area, select when users will receive notications about sent emails. The default
setting is using the signed in user's email address. If the recipient email address is blank, no
notication is sent.
9. In the Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences.
Table 6-8
Scan Settings
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize the output of a particular type of content.
70 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-8 Scan Settings (continued)
Feature Description
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or
Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background
color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a
preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or
millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.
10. Review the selected options to verify that they are accurate, and then click Apply to complete the
setup.
Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
Quick Sets are optional short-cut jobs that can be accessed on the main Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application at the printer. Use the following procedure to congure the Quick Sets.
1. In the Email Setup area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets.
2. Select one of the following options:
● Select an existing Quick Set under Quick Sets Application in the table.
-OR-
● Click Add to start the Quick Set Wizard.
3. If you selected Add, the Quick Sets Setup page opens. Complete the following information:
● Quick Set Name: Enter a title for the new Quick Set.
● Quick Set Description: Enter a description of the Quick Set.
● Quick Set Start Option: To set how the Quick Set starts, click either Enter application, then
user presses Start or Start instantly when selected from the Home Screen.
4. Dene the following settings for the Quick Set: Address and Message Field Control, Signing and
Encryption, Notication, Scan Settings, File Settings.
5. Click Finish to save the Quick Set.
Step
ve: Set up Send to Email to use Ofce 365 Outlook (optional)
Enable the printer to send an email with an Ofce 365 Outlook account from the control panel.
Step four:
Congure the Quick Sets (optional) 71
Introduction
Microsoft Ofce 365 Outlook is a cloud-based email system provided by Microsoft which uses Microsoft's
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server to send or receive emails. Complete the following to enable
the printer to send an email with an Ofce 365 Outlook account from the control panel.
NOTE: You must have an email address account with Ofce 365 Outlook to congure the settings in
the EWS.
Congure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Ofce 365 Outlook
account
Congure the outgoing email server using the following procedure.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.
2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings.
3. In the TCP/IP Settings area, click the Network Identication tab.
4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Sufx area, verify that the DNS sufx for the
email client being used is listed. DNS sufxes have this format: companyname.com, Gmail.com, etc.
NOTE: If the Domain Name sufx is not set up, use the IP address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
7. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Email Settings.
72
Chapter 6 Scan
8. Select the Enable Scan to Email check box. If this check box is not available, the feature is
unavailable at the printer control panel.
9. In the Outgoing Email Servers (SMTP) area, click Add to start the SMTP wizard.
10. In the I know my SMTP server address or host name eld, type smtp.onoffice.com, and then
click Next.
11. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, in the Port Number
eld, type 587.
NOTE: Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5 megabytes
(MB). These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split emails if larger than (MB).
12. Select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol check box, and then click Next.
13. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, enter the following information:
a. Select Server requires authentication.
b. From the drop-down list, select Always use these credentials.
c. In the Username eld, type the Ofce 365 Outlook email address.
d. In the Password eld, type the Ofce 365 Outlook account password, and then click Next.
14. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this SMTP
server, and then click Next.
15. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send a test email to: eld, and
then click Test.
16. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email server
setup.
For more information, go to Microsoft's Support page.
Congure
the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Ofce 365 Outlook account 73
Set up Scan to Network Folder
Set up the Scan to Folder feature to scan documents directly to network folder.
Introduction
This section explains how to enable and congure the Scan to Network Folder function. The printer has a
feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a network folder. To use this scan feature, the
printer must be connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until it has been congured.
There are two methods for conguring Scan to Network Folder, the Save to Network Folder Setup
Wizard for basic setup and Save to Network Folder Setup for advanced setup.
Before you begin
Have the following items available before you set up the Scan to Network feature.
NOTE: To set up the Scan to Network Folder feature, the printer must have an active network
connection.
Administrators need the following items before beginning the conguration process.
● Administrative access to the printer.
● The fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) (e.g., \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans) of the
destination folder OR the IP address of the server (e.g., \\16.88.20.20\scans).
NOTE: The use of the term "server" in this context refers to the computer where the shared folder
resides.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
NOTE: The gure in this topic shows an EWS screen for a color printer. However, the procedure below is
valid for both color and mono printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
74
Chapter 6 Scan
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder
Set up Scan to Network Folder using one of the following methods.
Method one: Use the Scan to Network Folder Wizard
Use this option for basic conguration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the Scan to Network
Folder wizard.
NOTE: Before you begin: To display the printer's IP address or host name, touch the Information icon ,
and then touch the Network icon
on the printer's control panel. Enter the IP address into a Web
browser to open the EWS.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send tab. The Email and Scan to Network
Folder Quick Setup Wizards dialog opens.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards.
3. Click the Save to Network Folder Quick Set Wizard link.
4. On the Add or Remove a Save to Network Folder Quick Set dialog, click Add.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the
Quick Sets application.
NOTE: The Save to Network Folder feature can be minimally congured without creating a quick
set. However, without the Quick Set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control
panel for each scan job. A quick set is required to include Save to Network Folder metadata.
5. On the Add Folder Quick Set dialog, complete the following information:
a. In the Quick Set Title eld, type a title.
NOTE: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save
to a folder").
b. In the Quick Set Description eld, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.
c. Click Next.
6. On the Congure Destination Folder dialog, complete the following information:
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder
75
a. In the UNC Folder Path eld, type a folder path where the scan will go.
The folder path can either be the fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the
server. Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.
FQDN example: \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans
IP address example: \\16.88.20.20\scans
NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address via
DHCP, the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be faster
because the printer does not need to use DNS to nd the destination server.
b. From the Authentication Settings drop-down, select one of the following options:
● Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel
● Always use these credentials
NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be
entered in the corresponding elds, and the printer’s access to the folder must be veried
by clicking Verify Access.
c. In the Windows Domain eld, type the Windows domain.
TIP: To nd the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click System.
To nd the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and
then click System.
The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.
d. Click Next.
7. On the Congure File Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set,
and then click Next.
8. Review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.
Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup
This option enables advanced conguration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for the printer.
NOTE: Before you begin: To display the printer's IP address or host name, touch the Information icon ,
and then touch the Network icon on the printer's control panel. Enter the IP address into a Web
browser to open the EWS.
Step one: Begin the conguration
Use the following steps to begin Scan to Network Folder setup.
1. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Network Folder Setup.
Step two: Congure the Scan to Network Folder settings
Use the following procedure to complete Scan to Network Folder setup.
76
Chapter 6 Scan
Step one: Begin the conguration
Use the following steps to begin conguration.
1. On the Scan to Network Folder Setup page, select the Enable Scan to Network Folder check box. If
this box is not selected, the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
2. In the Scan to Network Folder area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets. Click Add to open the
Quick Sets Setup dialog.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the
Quick Sets application.
NOTE: The Scan to Network Folder feature can be minimally congured without creating a Quick
Set. However, without the Quick Set, users must enter the destination folder information at the
control panel for each scan job. A Quick Set is required to include Scan to Network Folder metadata.
Complete all of the settings in the Quick Set Setup to fully congure the Scan to Network Folder feature.
Dialog one: Set the Quick Set name, description, and options for user interaction at the control panel
Set the Quick Set details for user interaction at the printer's control panel.
Use the Set the button location for the Quick Set and options for user interaction at the control
panel dialog to congure where the Quick Set button will display on the printer control panel and to
congure the level of user interaction at the printer control panel.
1. In the Quick Set Name eld, type a title.
NOTE: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a
folder").
2. In the Quick Set Description eld, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.
3. From the Quick Set Start Option list, select one of the following options:
● Option one: Enter application, then user presses Start.
● Option two: Start instantly upon selection.
Select one of the following prompt options :
○ Prompt for original sides
○ Prompt for additional pages
○ Require Preview
NOTE: If Start instantly upon selection is selected, the destination folder must be entered in
the next step.
4. Click Next.
Dialog two: Folder Settings
Use the Folder Settings dialog to congure the types of folders the printer sends scanned documents to
and the folder permissions.
There are two types of destination folders to select from:
Step one: Begin the
conguration 77
● Shared folders or FTP folders
● Personal shared folders
There are two types of folder permissions to select from:
● Read and write access
● Write access only
Congure the destination folder for scanned documents
Select one of the following options to set up a destination folder.
Option 1: Congure the printer to save to a shared folder or FTP folder
To save scanned documents to a standard shared folder or an FTP folder, complete the following steps.
1. If it is not already selected, select Save to shared folders or FTP folders.
2. Click Add.... The Add Network Folder Path dialog opens.
3. On the Add Network Folder Path dialog, select one of the following options:
● Option one: Save to a standard shared network folder.
a. If it is not already selected, select Save to a standard shared network folder.
b. In the UNC Folder Path eld, type a folder path.
The folder path can either be the fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of
the server. Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.
FQDN example: \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans
78
Chapter 6 Scan
IP address example: \\16.88.20.20\scans
NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address
via DHCP, the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be
faster because the printer does not need to use DNS to nd the destination server.
c. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select
a format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.
To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict
subfolder access to user.
d. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.
e. From the Authentication Settings list, select one of the following options:
– Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel
– Always use these credentials
NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be
entered in the corresponding elds.
f. In the Windows Domain eld, type the Windows domain.
NOTE: To nd the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click
System.
To nd the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box,
and then click System.
The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.
NOTE: If a shared folder is set to be accessed by everyone, values for a workgroup name
(default is “Workgroup”), a user name, and password must be entered in the corresponding
elds. However, if the folder is within a particular user’s folders and not Public, the user
name and password of that user must be used.
NOTE: An IP address might be necessary instead of a computer name. Many home
routers do not handle computer names well, and there is no Domain Name Server (DNS). In
this case, it is best to set up a static IP address on the shared PC to alleviate the problem of
DHCP assigning a new IP address. On a typical home router, this is done by setting a static IP
address that is on the same subnet, but outside the DHCP address range.
g. Click OK.
● Option two: Save to an FTP Server.
Option 1:
Congure the printer to save to a shared folder or FTP folder 79
NOTE: If an FTP site is outside the rewall, a proxy server must be specied under the network
settings. These settings are located in the EWS Networking tab, under the Advanced options.
a. Select Save to an FTP Server.
b. In the FTP Server eld, type the FTP server name or IP address.
c. In the Port eld, type the port number.
NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.
d. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select
a format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.
e. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.
f. From the FTP Transfer Mode list, select one of the following options:
– Passive
– Active
g. In the Username eld, type the user name.
h. In the Password eld, type the password.
i. Click Verify Access to conrm the destination can be accessed.
j. Click OK.
80
Chapter 6 Scan
Option 2: Congure the printer to save to a personal shared folder
To save scanned documents to a personal shared folder, complete the following steps.
NOTE: This option is used in domain environments where the administrator congures a shared folder
for each user. If the Save to a personal shared folder feature is congured, users will be required to sign
in at the printer control panel using Windows credentials or LDAP authentication.
1. Select Save to a personal shared folder.
2. In the Retrieve the device user’s home folder using this attribute eld, type the user’s home folder
in the Microsoft Active Directory.
NOTE: Verify that the user knows where this home folder is located on the network.
3. To add a user name subfolder at the end of the folder path, select Create subfolder based on user
name.
To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict subfolder
access to user.
Select the destination folder permissions
Select one of the following options to set up destination folder permissions.
Option 1: Congure read and write access
To send scanned documents to a folder congured for read and write access, complete the following
steps.
NOTE: Send only to folders with read and write access supports folder verication and job
notication.
1. If it is not already selected, select Send only to folders with read and write access.
2. To require the printer to verify folder access before starting a scan job, select Verify folder access
prior to job start.
NOTE: Scan jobs can complete more quickly if Verify folder access prior to job start is not
selected; however, if the folder is unavailable, the scan job will fail.
3. Click Next.
Option 2: Congure write access only
To send scanned documents to a folder congured for write access only, complete the following steps.
NOTE: Allow sending to folders with write access only does not support folder verication or job
notication.
NOTE: If this option is selected, the printer cannot increment the scan lename. It sends the same
lename for all scans.
Select a time-related lename prex or sufx for the scan lename, so that each scan is saved as a
unique le, and does not overwrite a previous le. This lename is determined by the information in the
File Settings dialog in the Quick Set Wizard.
1. Select Allow sending to folders with write access only.
Option 2:
Congure the printer to save to a personal shared folder 81
2. Click Next.
Dialog three: Notication Settings
Use the Notication Settings dialog to congure when notications will be sent.
■
On the Notication Settings dialog, complete one of the following tasks:
● Option one: Do not notify.
a. Select Do not notify.
b. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start,
and then click Next.
● Option two: Notify when job completes.
a. Select Notify when job completes.
b. Select the method for delivering the notication from the Method Used to Deliver
Notication list.
If the method of notication selected is Email, type the email address in the Notication
Email Address eld.
c. To include a thumbnail of the rst scanned page in the notication, select Include Thumbnail.
d. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start,
and then click Next.
● Option three: Notify only if job fails.
a. Select Notify only if job fails.
b. Select the method for delivering the notication from the Method Used to Deliver
Notication list.
If the method of notication selected is Email, type the email address in the Notication
Email Address eld.
c. To include a thumbnail of the rst scanned page in the notication, select Include Thumbnail.
d. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start,
and then click Next.
Dialog four: Scan Settings
Complete the scan settings as follows.
On the Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
Table 6-9
Scan settings
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
82 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-9 Scan settings (continued)
Feature Description
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page:
Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a
light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or
to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping
option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either
inches or millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.
Dialog ve: File Settings
Complete the le settings as follows.
On the File Settings dialog, set the default le settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
Table 6-10
File settings
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the
printer control panel.
File Name Sufx Set the default le name sufx used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has just one le (ex.
_1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one
le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the
printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size.
However, the scanning process for a High compression le might take longer
than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A
password must be specied as part of the encryption. The same password
must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to enter a password
prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Dialog ve: File Settings 83
Table 6-10 File settings (continued)
Feature Description
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots
per inch and show less detail, but the le size is smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size
than lower-quality images, and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black
only.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Metadata File Format Use the drop-down list to select the le format for metadata information.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a
predetermined maximum number of pages per le.
Dialog six: Summary
On the Summary dialog, review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.
Step three: Complete the conguration
Use the following steps to complete Scan to Network Folder setup.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Network Folder.
2. On the Scan to Network Folder page, review the selected settings, and then click Apply to complete
the setup.
Set up Scan to SharePoint
Use Scan to SharePoint to scan documents directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site. This feature eliminates
the need to scan the documents to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message, and then manually
upload the les to the SharePoint site.
Introduction
Set up the Scan to SharePoint feature, and then scan documents directly to a SharePoint site.
Scan to SharePoint supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or
use the OCR features to create text les or searchable PDFs.
The feature is disabled by default. Enable Save to Sharepoint in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Before you begin
Before this procedure can be completed, the destination folder that the scanned les will be saved to
must exist on the SharePoint site, and write access must be enabled to the destination folder. Scan to
SharePoint is disabled by default.
84
Chapter 6 Scan
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
NOTE: The gure in this topic shows an EWS screen for a color printer. However, the procedure below is
valid for both color and mono printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick
Set
Follow the steps to enable the Scan to SharePoint feature and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set.
1. Using the top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the
Quick Sets application.
3. Select Enable Scan to SharePoint®, and then click Apply.
4. In the Scan to SharePoint area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets. Click Add to launch the
Quick Set Wizard.
5. Enter a Quick Set Name (for example, “Scan to SharePoint”) and a Quick Set Description.
6. Select a Quick Set Start Option to determine what occurs after selecting a Quick Set on the printer
control panel, and then click Next.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
85
7. Use the following steps to add the path to the SharePoint folder:
a. Click Add on the SharePoint Destination Settings page to open the Add SharePoint Path
page.
b. Open another browser window, navigate to the SharePoint folder to use, and then copy the
folder path for the SharePoint folder from that browser window.
c. Paste the SharePoint folder path into the SharePoint Path: eld.
d. By default, the printer overwrites an existing le that has the same le name as the new le.
Clear Overwrite existing les so that a new le with the same name as an existing le is given
an updated time/date stamp.
e. Select an option from the Authentication Settings drop-down menu. Select whether it is
necessary to sign in to the SharePoint site with credentials, or store the credentials within the
Quick Set.
NOTE: Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel is selected in
the Authentication Settings drop-down menu, the logged-in user must have permission to
write to the specied SharePoint site.
NOTE: For security purposes, the printer does not display credentials entered in the Quick Set
Wizard.
f. Click OK to complete the SharePoint path setup, and navigate back to the SharePoint
Destination Settings page.
8. Select Verify folder access prior to job start to ensure that the SharePoint folder specied as the
destination folder is accessible each time the Quick Set is used. If this option is not selected, jobs
can be saved to the SharePoint folder more quickly. However, if this option is not selected and the
SharePoint folder is inaccessible, the job will fail.
9. Click Next.
10. Set a Condition on Which to Notify on the Notication Settings page. This setting congures the
Quick Set to either not notify, or to send email messages or print a summary page if a job either
completes successfully or fails. Select one of the following options from the Condition on Which to
Notify drop-down menu:
● Select Do not notify for the Quick Set to not perform any notication action when a job
completes successfully or fails.
● Select Notify when job completes to for the Quick Set to send a notication when a job
completes successfully.
● Select Notify only if job fails to for the Quick Set to send a notication only when a job fails.
Selecting either Notify when job completes or Notify only if job fails requires the Method Used to
Deliver Notication: to be set. Select from the following options:
● Email: Use this option to send an email when the selected notication condition occurs. This
option requires a valid email address in the Notication Email Address: eld.
NOTE: To use the email notication feature, rst congure the email feature on the printer.
86
Chapter 6 Scan
● Print: Use this option to print the notication when the selected notication condition occurs.
NOTE: Select Include Thumbnail for either notication option to include a thumbnail image of
the rst page of the scanned page of the job.
11. Click Next.
12. Select options from the Scan Settings page, and then click Next. For more information, see Table
6-12 Scan settings for Scan to SharePoint on page 88.
13. Select options from the File Settings page, and then click Next. For more information, see Table
6-13 File settings for Scan to SharePoint on page 89.
14. Review the summary of settings. Click Finish to save the Quick Set or click Previous to edit the
settings.
Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site
Follow the steps to scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan
icon, and then select Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
3. Under Quick Sets, touch Select, select a Quick Set, and then select Load.
4. Touch the File Name: text eld to open a keyboard. Type the name for the le using either the
on-screen keyboard or the physical keyboard, and touch the Enter button .
5. Touch Options to view and congure settings for the document.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on
the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-11
Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site 87
Table 6-11 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save it to the SharePoint location.
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint
Review the settings and options available in the Quick Set Wizard when adding, editing, or copying a Scan
to SharePoint Quick Set.
Table 6-12
Scan settings for Scan to SharePoint
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page:
Portrait or Landscape.
88 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-12 Scan settings for Scan to SharePoint (continued)
Feature Description
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a
light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or
to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping
option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either
inches or millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.
Table 6-13 File settings for Scan to SharePoint
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les to be saved.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the
printer control panel.
File Name Sufx Set the default le name sufx used for les to be saved.
Duplicate lename sufx default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has just one le (ex.
_1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one
le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the
printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size.
However, the scanning process for a High compression le might take longer
than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A
password must be specied as part of the encryption. The same password
must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to enter a password
prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots
per inch and show less detail, but the le size is smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size
than lower-quality images, and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint 89
Table 6-13 File settings for Scan to SharePoint (continued)
Feature Description
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a
predetermined maximum number of pages per le.
Set up Scan to USB Drive
Enable the Scan to USB Drive feature, which allows you to scan directly to a USB ash drive.
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a USB ash drive. The feature is
not available until it has been congured through the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
NOTE: The gure in this topic shows an EWS screen for a color printer. However, the procedure below is
valid for both color and mono printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive
Enable Scan to USB Drive using the following steps.
1. Select the Security tab.
90
Chapter 6 Scan
2. Scroll to Hardware Ports and make sure that Enable Host USB plug and play is enabled.
3. Select the Scan/Digital Send tab and then click the Scan to USB Driver Settings option in the left
navigation pane.
4. Select the Enable Scan to USB Drive check box.
5. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.
NOTE: Most devices ship with hard disk drives (HDDs) already installed. In some cases, additional
storage devices can be added via USB. Verify whether the Save to USB feature needs to be expanded to
USB and hard drive.
Step three: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
Use the following steps to set up Quick Sets for Scan to USB Drive. Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can
be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick Sets application.
1. In the Scan to USB Drive area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets.
2. Select one of the following options:
● Select an existing Quick Set under Quick Sets Application in the table.
-OR-
● Click Add to start the Quick Set Wizard.
3. If you clicked Add, the Quick Sets Setup page opens. Complete the following information:
a. Quick Set Name: Enter a title for the new Quick Set.
b. Quick Set Description: Enter a description of the Quick Set.
c. Quick Set Start Option: To set how the Quick Set starts, click either Enter application, then
user presses Start or Start instantly when selected from the Home Screen.
4. Select a default location where scanned les are saved on USB storage devices inserted into the
USB port on the control panel, and then click Next. The default location options are:
● Save at root directory of the USB storage device.
● Create or place in this folder on the USB Storage Device — The path to the folder on the USB
storage device must be specied when using this le location option. A backslash \ must be
used to separate folder\subfolder names in the path.
5. Select an option from the Condition on Which to Notify: drop-down list, and then click Next.
This setting determines if, or how, users are notied when a Save To USB Quick Set job completes or
fails. The options for the Condition on Which to Notify: setting are:
● Do not notify
● Notify when job completes
● Notify only if job fails
Step three:
Congure the Quick Sets (optional) 91
6. Choose the Scan Settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
NOTE: For more information on the available scan settings, see Default scan settings for Scan to
USB Drive setup on page 92
7. Choose the File Settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
NOTE: For more information on the available le settings, see Default scan settings for Scan to
USB Drive setup on page 92
8. Review the summary of settings, and then click Finish to save the Quick Set, or click Previous to edit
the settings.
Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
Review the default settings for Scan to USB Drive setup.
Table 6-14 Scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or
Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or
millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.
Default le settings for Save to USB setup
Review the options for Save to USB setup.
Table 6-15
File settings for Save to USB setup
Option name Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Sufx Set the default le name sufx used for les saved to a network folder.
Duplicate lename sufx default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
92 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-15 File settings for Save to USB setup (continued)
Option name Description
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple
les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller
le)
Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the
scanning process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression
le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied
as part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be
prompted to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting
the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they
show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the
le size is smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality
images, and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number
of pages per le.
Scan to email
Scan a document directly to an email address or contact list. The scanned document is sent as an email
message attachment.
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
Scan to email
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to an email address or contact list.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan
icon, and then select Scan to Email.
NOTE: If prompted, type your user name and password.
Scan to email
93
3. Touch the To eld to open a keyboard.
NOTE: If you are signed in to the printer, your user name or other default information might appear
in the From eld. If so, you might not be able to change it.
4. Specify the recipients by using one of these methods:
● Use the keypad to enter the address in the To eld.
To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a semicolon, or select the Enter
button on the touchscreen keyboard after typing each address.
● Use a contact list as follows:
a. Select the Contacts button that is next to the To eld to open the Contacts screen.
b. Select the appropriate contact list.
c. Select a name or names from the list of contacts to add to the recipients list, and then
select Add.
5. Complete the Subject, File Name, and Message elds by touching the eld and using the touchscreen
keyboard to enter information. Select the Close button whenever you need to close the
keyboard.
6. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Quick Sets list.
NOTE: Quick Sets are predened settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph,
and High Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.
7. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation,
select Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select
Done if prompted.
8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the
Expand and Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview
screen.
Table 6-16
Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate,
insert, or remove pages.
94
Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-17 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
Scan to email 95
9. When the document is ready, select Send to email it.
NOTE: The printer might prompt you to add the email address to the contact list.
Scan to job storage
Scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer.
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the
printer. You can retrieve the document from the printer and print it when needed.
NOTE: Before you can scan to a storage folder on the printer, your printer administrator or IT
department must use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable the feature and congure the settings.
Scan to job storage on the printer
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer so that you can
print copies at any time.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan
icon, and then select Scan to Job Storage.
NOTE: If prompted, enter your user name and password.
3. Select the default storage folder name shown under Folder.
If the printer administrator has congured the option, you can create a new folder. Follow these steps
to create a new folder:
a. Select the New Folder icon .
b. Select the New Folder eld, type the folder name, and then select OK.
4. Make sure that you have selected the correct folder.
5. Touch the Job Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then
select the Enter button .
6. To make the job private, select the PIN button , enter a four-digit PIN in the PIN eld, and then close
the touchscreen keypad.
7. To congure settings, such as Sides and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower left corner,
and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each setting if prompted.
96
Chapter 6 Scan
8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the
Expand and Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview
screen.
Table 6-18 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate,
insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-19 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Scan to job storage on the printer 97
Table 6-19 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
9. When the document is ready, select Save to save the le to the storage folder.
Print from job storage on the printer
Use this procedure to print a scanned document that is in a job storage folder on the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, select the Print
icon, and then select Print from Job Storage.
2. Under Stored Jobs to Print, select Choose, select the folder in which the document is saved, select
the document, and then select Select.
3. If the document is private, enter the four-digit PIN in the Password eld, and then select OK.
4. To adjust the number of copies, touch the box to the left of the Print button, and then select the
number of copies from the keypad that opens. Select the Close button to close the keypad.
5. Select Print to print the document.
Scan to network folder
Scan a document and save it to a folder on the network.
Introduction
The printer can scan a le and save it in a shared folder on the network.
98
Chapter 6 Scan
Scan to network folder
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it to a network folder.
NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan
icon, and then select Scan to Network Folder.
3. Specify a folder destination. Folder options must rst be congured by the printer administrator.
● To select a folder location that the administrator already set up, select Load under Quick Sets
and Defaults, select the folder, and then select Load.
● To specify a new folder location, touch the Folder Paths eld to open a touchscreen keyboard,
type the path to the folder, and then select the Enter button . Enter user credentials if
prompted and then select Save to save the path.
NOTE: Use this format for the path: \\server\folder, where “server” is the name of the
server that hosts the shared folder, and “folder” is the name of the shared folder. If the folder is
nested inside other folders, complete all necessary segments of the path to reach the folder. For
example: \\server\folder\folder
NOTE: The Folder Paths eld might have a pre-dened path, and it might not be editable. In this
situation, the administrator has congured this folder for common access.
4. Touch the File Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then
select the Enter button .
5. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation,
select Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select
Done for each setting if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the
Expand and Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview
screen.
Table 6-20
Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Scan to network folder 99
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate,
insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-21 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
100 Chapter 6 Scan
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save the le to the network folder.
Scan to SharePoint
Scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
Introduction
If you have a workow-equipped printer, you can scan a document and send it to a SharePoint site. This
feature eliminates the need to scan the documents to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message,
and then manually upload the les to the SharePoint site.
Scan to SharePoint supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or
use the OCR features to create text les or searchable PDFs.
NOTE: Before you can scan to SharePoint, your printer administrator or IT department must use the HP
Embedded Web Server to enable the feature and set it up.
Scan to SharePoint
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan
icon, and then select Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
3. Under Quick Sets, touch Select, select a Quick Set, and then select Load.
4. Select the File Name: text eld to open a keyboard. Type the name for the le, and then select the
enter button .
5. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if
prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the
Expand and Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview
screen.
Table 6-22
Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Scan to SharePoint 101
Table 6-22 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate,
insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-23 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
102 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-23 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save it to the SharePoint location.
Scan to USB drive
Scan a document directly to a USB drive.
Introduction
The printer can scan a le and save it to a USB ash drive.
Scan to USB drive
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to a USB drive.
NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. Insert the USB drive into the USB port near the printer control panel.
3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan
icon, and then select Scan to USB Drive.
4. Select the USB drive under Destination, and then select the save location (either the root of the USB
drive or an existing folder).
5. Touch the File Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then
select the Enter button .
6. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation,
select Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select
Done if prompted.
Scan to USB drive
103
7. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the
Expand and Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview
screen.
Table 6-24 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate,
insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-25 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
104 Chapter 6 Scan
Table 6-25 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
8. When the document is ready, select Save to save the le to the USB drive.
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
HP JetAdvantage solutions are workow and printing solutions that are easy to use, and both network-
and cloud-based. HP JetAdvantage solutions are designed to help businesses of all types, including
healthcare, nancial services, manufacturing, and public sector, manage a eet of printers and scanners.
HP JetAdvantage Solutions include:
● HP JetAdvantage Security solutions
● HP JetAdvantage Management solutions
● HP JetAdvantage Workow solutions
● HP JetAdvantage Mobile Printing solutions
For more information about HP JetAdvantage business workow and printing solutions, go to
www.hp.com/go/PrintSolutions.
Additional scan tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common scan tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
105
Instructions are available for performing specic scan tasks, such as the following:
● Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents
● Send a scanned document to a folder in the printer memory
● Copy or scan both sides of an identication card
● Copy or scan a document into a booklet format
106 Chapter 6 Scan
Fax7
Congure the fax features, and send and receive faxes using the printer.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Set up fax
Set up the fax features for the printer.
Introduction
This information applies to fax and Flow models, or to other printers when an optional analog fax
accessory has been installed. Before continuing, connect the printer to a phone line (for analog fax) or
to an Internet or network fax service.
Set up fax by using the printer control panel
Congure the fax features using the control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Internal Fax Modem Setup
NOTE: If the Internal Fax Modem Setup menu does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or
Internet fax might be enabled. When LAN or Internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is
disabled and the Internal Fax Modem Setup menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either
LAN fax, analog fax, or Internet fax, can be enabled at a time. To use analog fax when LAN fax is
enabled, use the HP Embedded Web Server to disable LAN fax.
3. Select the location from the list on the right side of the screen, and then select Next.
Fax
107
4. Touch the Company Name text eld, and use the keypad to type the company name.
5. Touch the Fax Number text eld, and use the keypad to type the sending fax number. Select Next.
6. Verify that the date and time settings are correct. Make changes as necessary, and then select Next.
7. If a dialing prex is required for sending faxes, touch the Dialing Prex text eld, and use the keypad to
enter the number.
8. Review all the information on the left pane, and then select Finish to complete the fax setup.
Change fax congurations
Change or update fax settings.
NOTE: The settings congured using the control panel override any settings made in the HP Embedded
Web Server.
Fax dialing settings
Use the following steps to change the fax dialing settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. Fax Dialing Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-1
Fax dialing settings
Menu item Description
Redial on Error The Redial on Error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed
when an error occurs during a fax transmission.
Redial on No Answer The Redial on No Answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory
redials if the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1
(used in the U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the location setting. The interval between
retries is set by the Redial Interval setting.
Redial on Busy The Redial on Busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax
accessory redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between
retries is set by the Redial Interval setting.
Redial Interval The Redial Interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the
number dialed is busy or not answering, or if an error occurs.
NOTE: You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the
Redial on Busy and Redial on No Answer settings are set to off. This occurs when
the fax accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the
connection. As a result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs three
automatic redial attempts regardless of the redial settings. During this redial
operation, a message displays on the control panel to indicate that a redial is in
progress.
108 Chapter 7 Fax
Table 7-1 Fax dialing settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Fax Send Speed The Fax Send Speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per
second) of the Analog Fax modem while sending a fax.
● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●
Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
●
Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Line Monitor Volume Use the Line Monitor Volume setting to control the printer's dialing volume level
when sending faxes.
Dialing Mode The Dialing Mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-
tone phones) or pulse (rotary-dial phones).
Dialing Prex The Dialing Prex setting allows you to enter a prex number (such as a "9" to
access an outside line) when dialing. This prex number is automatically added to
all phone numbers when dialed.
Detect Dial Tone The Detect Dial Tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone
before sending a fax.
General fax send settings
Use the following steps to change the fax send settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. General Fax Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-2
Fax send settings
Menu item Description
Fax Number Conrmation When the Fax Number Conrmation feature is enabled, the fax number must be
entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The feature is disabled by
default.
PC Fax Send Use the PC Fax Send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by
default.
General fax send settings 109
Table 7-2 Fax send settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Error Correction Mode Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it
is sending or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the
transmission and the Error Correction Mode setting is on, the fax accessory can
request that the error portion of the fax be sent again.
The Error Correction Mode feature is enabled by default. You should turn it off
only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing
to accept the errors in the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the
image. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax
overseas or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone
connection.
NOTE: Some VoIP providers might suggest turning off the Error Correction
Mode setting. However, this is not usually necessary.
Fax Header Use the Fax Header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top,
and content is shifted down, or if the header is overlaid on top of the previous
header.
Fax receive settings
Use the following steps to change the fax receive settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Fax Receive Setup
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-3
Fax receive settings
Menu item Description
Rings to Answer The Rings to Answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings
before the call is answered by the fax accessory.
NOTE: The default range for the available options for the Rings to Answer
setting is location-specic. The range of possible Rings to Answer options is
limited by location.
If the fax accessory is not answering, and the Rings to Answer setting is 1, try
increasing it to 2.
Ring Volume The Ring Volume setting allows you to adjust the ringer volume.
Fax Receive Speed Touch the Fax Receive Speed drop-down menu and select one of the following
options:
● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●
Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
●
Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
110 Chapter 7 Fax
Change fax congurations
Change or update fax settings.
NOTE: The settings congured using the control panel override any settings made in the HP Embedded
Web Server.
Fax dialing settings
Use the following steps to change the fax dialing settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. Fax Dialing Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-4 Fax dialing settings
Menu item Description
Redial on Error The Redial on Error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed
when an error occurs during a fax transmission.
Redial on No Answer The Redial on No Answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory
redials if the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1
(used in the U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the location setting. The interval between
retries is set by the Redial Interval setting.
Redial on Busy The Redial on Busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax
accessory redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between
retries is set by the Redial Interval setting.
Redial Interval The Redial Interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the
number dialed is busy or not answering, or if an error occurs.
NOTE: You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the
Redial on Busy and Redial on No Answer settings are set to off. This occurs when
the fax accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the
connection. As a result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs three
automatic redial attempts regardless of the redial settings. During this redial
operation, a message displays on the control panel to indicate that a redial is in
progress.
Fax Send Speed The Fax Send Speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per
second) of the Analog Fax modem while sending a fax.
● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●
Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
●
Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Line Monitor Volume Use the Line Monitor Volume setting to control the printer's dialing volume level
when sending faxes.
Change fax congurations 111
Table 7-4 Fax dialing settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Dialing Mode The Dialing Mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-
tone phones) or pulse (rotary-dial phones).
Dialing Prex The Dialing Prex setting allows you to enter a prex number (such as a "9" to
access an outside line) when dialing. This prex number is automatically added to
all phone numbers when dialed.
Detect Dial Tone The Detect Dial Tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone
before sending a fax.
General fax send settings
Use the following steps to change the fax send settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. General Fax Send Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-5
Fax send settings
Menu item Description
Fax Number Conrmation When the Fax Number Conrmation feature is enabled, the fax number must be
entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The feature is disabled by
default.
PC Fax Send Use the PC Fax Send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by
default.
Error Correction Mode Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it
is sending or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the
transmission and the Error Correction Mode setting is on, the fax accessory can
request that the error portion of the fax be sent again.
The Error Correction Mode feature is enabled by default. You should turn it off
only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing
to accept the errors in the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the
image. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax
overseas or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone
connection.
NOTE: Some VoIP providers might suggest turning off the Error Correction
Mode setting. However, this is not usually necessary.
Fax Header Use the Fax Header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top,
and content is shifted down, or if the header is overlaid on top of the previous
header.
Fax receive settings
Use the following steps to change the fax receive settings.
112
Chapter 7 Fax
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Fax Receive Setup
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-6 Fax receive settings
Menu item Description
Rings to Answer The Rings to Answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings
before the call is answered by the fax accessory.
NOTE: The default range for the available options for the Rings to Answer
setting is location-specic. The range of possible Rings to Answer options is
limited by location.
If the fax accessory is not answering, and the Rings to Answer setting is 1, try
increasing it to 2.
Ring Volume The Ring Volume setting allows you to adjust the ringer volume.
Fax Receive Speed Touch the Fax Receive Speed drop-down menu and select one of the following
options:
● Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●
Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
●
Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Send a fax
Use the following steps to send a fax from the printer.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and
adjust the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select
the Fax icon. You might be prompted to type a user name and password.
3. Specify the recipients using one of these methods:
● Use the keypad to enter the recipient or recipients.
Touch the Fax Recipients text eld, and then use the keypad to enter the fax number. To send to
multiple fax numbers, separate the numbers with a semicolon, or select the Enter button on
the touchscreen keyboard after typing each number.
● Use a contact list as follows:
a. Select the Contacts button that is next to the Fax Recipients eld to open the Contacts
screen.
b. Select the appropriate contact list.
Send a fax
113
c. Select a name or names from the list of contacts to add to the recipients list, and then
select Add.
4. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Quick Sets list.
NOTE: Quick Sets are predened settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph,
and High Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.
5. To congure settings, such as Resolution, Sides, and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower
left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the
Expand and Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview
screen.
Table 7-7 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate,
insert, or remove pages.
Table 7-8
Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are
available in thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
114 Chapter 7 Fax
Table 7-8 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and
move them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
Touch this button to write, highlight, blackout, or erase in the preview and print out the changes.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to send the fax.
Create a fax printing schedule
Faxes print automatically upon receipt, but they can also be stored and printed on a schedule that you
determine. After you create the schedule, you can enable or disable the schedule as needed.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Fax Printing Schedule
3. Under Incoming Fax Options, select Use Schedule.
Create a fax printing schedule
115
4. Select New Event.
5. Select an option under Event Type.
● Begin Printing
● Begin Storing
6. Choose a time and the day. You can select multiple days.
7. Select Save. To add another event, repeat steps 4 – 6.
8. Select Done to enable the fax printing schedule.
Block incoming faxes
Use the fax block list setting to create a list of blocked phone numbers. When a fax is received from a
blocked phone number, the fax is not printed and is immediately deleted from memory.
Create a list of blocked fax numbers
Use the following steps to create the list of fax numbers to block.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Blocked Fax Numbers
3. Use one of the following options to add a number to the list:
● Select Add Last Sender.
● Select the New Fax Number eld, type the number on the keypad that appears, and then select
the Enter button . To add additional numbers, type the number and select the Enter button .
4. Select Done.
Delete numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers
Use the following steps to remove numbers from the list of blocked fax numbers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Blocked Fax Numbers
116
Chapter 7 Fax
3. Select one or more existing fax numbers in the list, or select Select All if you want to remove all the
numbers.
4. Select the Trash button , and then select Delete on the conrmation prompt.
Additional fax tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common fax tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
Instructions are available for fax tasks, such as the following:
● Create and manage fax speed dial lists
● Congure fax billing codes
● Use a fax printing schedule
● Block incoming faxes
● Fax archiving and forwarding
Additional fax tasks
117
Manage the printer8
Utilize management tools, congure security and energy-conservation settings, and manage rmware
updates for the printer.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Advanced
conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server
(EWS)
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage advanced printing functions.
Introduction
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printing functions from a computer instead of the printer
control panel.
● View printer status information
● Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones
● View and change tray congurations
● View and change the printer control-panel menu conguration
● View and print internal pages
● Receive notication of printer and supplies events
● View and change network conguration
The HP Embedded Web Server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The
HP Embedded Web Server does not support IPX-based printer connections. Internet access is not needed
to open and use the HP Embedded Web Server.
118
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.
NOTE: The HP Embedded Web Server is not accessible beyond the network rewall.
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Use the following steps to open the Embedded Web Server.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. On your computer, open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name
exactly as it displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
The EWS web page opens.
To use the HP Embedded Web Server, the browser must meet the following requirements:
Windows 10 or greater
● Microsoft Edge (version 93 or greater)
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
macOS
● Safari (version 5.x or greater)
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
Linux
● Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
● Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
HP Embedded Web Server features
Learn about the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) features available on each tab.
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
119
Figure 8-1 EWS Tabs
NOTE: Copy/Print, Scan/Digital Send, and Fax tabs only appear for multi-function printers (MFPs). A
Print tab appears for single-function printers (SFPs).
Information
tab
Settings available on the Information tab of the EWS.
Table 8-1
HP Embedded Web Server Information tab
Menu Description
Conguration Page Shows the information found on the conguration page.
Control Panel Snapshot Shows an image of the current screen on the control panel display.
Device Information Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To customize these
entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.
Device Status Shows the printer status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The
page also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default
settings, click the Change Settings link.
Event Log Page Shows a list of all printer events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in
the Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set
of dynamic web pages that help solve problems. These pages also show additional
services available for the printer.
Event Schedule Summary The Event Schedule Summary page is used to view a table of all scheduled events.
Job Log Provides a list of the jobs that have been processed.
Open Source Licenses Shows a summary of the licenses for open source software programs that can be
used with the printer.
Print Allows the user to send a print-ready le to the printer to be printed.
Printable Reports and Pages Lists the internal reports and pages for the printer. Select one or more items to print.
Remote Control-Panel Provides a way to troubleshoot or manage the printer from a browser window on a
desktop or laptop.
120 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Table 8-1 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab (continued)
Menu Description
Supplies Status Page Shows the status of the supplies for the printer.
Usage Page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size,
type, and paper print path.
General tab
Refer to the table for settings in the General tab.
Table 8-2 HP Embedded Web Server General tab
Menu Description
Control Panel Customization Reorder, show, or hide features on the control-panel display.
Change the default display language and keyboard layouts.
Quick Sets Congure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on the
printer control panel.
Alerts Set up email alerts for various printer and supplies events.
Control Panel Settings App Shows the Settings app options that are available on the printer control panel.
General Settings Congure how the printer recovers from jams and other general printer settings.
Auto Send To modify AutoSend settings, open the Embedded Web Server and go to General >
AutoSend.
Edit Other Links Add or customize a link to another website. This link displays in the footer area on all
HP Embedded Web Server pages.
Ordering Information Enter information about ordering replacement toner cartridges. This information
displays on the supplies status page.
Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary
contact who will receive information about the printer.
Language Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.
Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer rmware upgrade les.
Date/Time Settings Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.
Energy Settings Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the printer. Set a different
schedule for each day of the week and for holidays.
Set which interactions with the printer cause it to wake from sleep mode.
Back up and Restore Create a backup le that contains printer and user data. If necessary, use this le to
restore data to the printer.
Import/Export Provides import and export functionality for Home Screen settings, Quick Sets,
Contacts (Address Books), accounts and permissions, job apps, and other items.
The exported .zip le contains one or more .xml settings les or an editable .csv le
(containing user accounts or contacts). The le can be imported to other HP products.
Import a previously exported .zip le to transfer settings, user accounts, or contacts.
Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to the factory defaults.
Solution Installer Install or remove third-party software packages that extend or modify the functionality
of the printer.
General tab 121
Table 8-2 HP Embedded Web Server General tab (continued)
Menu Description
Job Statistics Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-statistics services, or enables
local serverless device job accounting.
Quota Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-quota services, or enables local
device quota service.
License Management Upload and Install License.
Copy/Print tab
Settings available on the
Copy/Print tab of the EWS.
Table 8-3 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab
Menu Description
Copy Settings Congure the default options and Quick Sets for copy jobs.
NOTE: If job-specic copy setting options are not set from the control panel at the
start of a job, the default settings will be used for the job.
Default Print Options Congure the default options for print jobs.
Expert Copy Enable or disable Expert Copy and set the initial copy view.
The Expert Copy feature is available only on some HP MFPs with larger control panels,
and is available in FutureSmart 4 rmware 24.7.3 release or later.
Manage Stored Jobs Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the printer memory.
Congure job-storage options.
Manage Stapler/Stacker Congure settings for the stapler/stacker for printers that have this feature.
Manage Trays Congure settings for paper trays.
PCL and PostScript Settings Adjust the PCL and PostScript settings for all print jobs, including copy jobs and
received faxes.
Print from USB Drive Settings Enable or disable the Print from USB Drive menu on the control panel.
Print Quality Congure the print quality settings, including color adjustment, image registration,
and allowed paper types.
Restrict Color
(Color printers only)
Permit or restrict color printing and copying.
Specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specic
software programs.
Scan/Digital Send tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Scan/Digital Send tab.
122
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Table 8-4 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab
Menu Description
Scan to Email Settings Congure the default email settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server
● Settings for Email Quick Sets jobs
● Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line
● Settings for digital signatures and encryption
● Settings for email notications
● Default scan settings for email jobs
● Default le settings for email jobs
Scan to Network Folder Settings
Congure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder
● Settings for notications
● Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder
● Default le settings for jobs saved in a network folder
Scan to SharePoint® Settings Congure the SharePoint settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site
● Default settings for jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site
Scan to OneDrive Settings Scan documents and save them in Microsoft OneDrive.
Scan to USB Drive Settings Congure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB ash drive
● Settings for notications
● Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB ash drive
● Default le settings for jobs saved on a USB ash drive
Scan+ Setup Scan to multiple destinations in a single job.
Watermark Use this feature to add a watermark to the document.
Stamps Select and congure content to be applied in up to six positions on the copy page.
Contacts Manage contacts, including the following:
● Add email addresses into the printer one at a time.
● Import a large list of frequently-used email addresses on to the printer all at
once, rather than adding them one at a time.
● Export contacts from the printer into a .CSV le on the computer to use as a data
backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.
● Edit email addresses that have already been saved in the printer.
Preferences Manage general scanning settings.
Scan/Digital Send tab 123
Table 8-4 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab (continued)
Menu Description
Email and Scan to Network Folder
Quick Setup Wizards
Congure the printer to send scanned images as email attachments.
Congure the printer to save scanned images to network-folder Quick Sets. Quick
Sets provide easy access to les saved on the network.
Digital Sending Software Setup Congure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.
Fax tab
Settings available on the
Fax tab of the EWS.
Table 8-5 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab
Menu Description
Fax Send Setup Congure settings for sending faxes, including the following:
● Default settings for outgoing faxes
● Settings for fax Quick Sets jobs
● Settings for notications
● Default setting for sending faxes using the internal fax modem
● Settings for using a LAN fax service
● Settings for using an Internet fax service
Watermark Use this feature to add a watermark to the document.
Stamps Select and congure content to be applied in up to six positions on the copy page.
Fax Speed Dials Manage speed dials, including the following:
● Import .CSV les containing email addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so
that they can be accessed on this printer.
● Export email, fax, or user records from the printer into a le on the computer to
use as a data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.
Fax Receive Setup Congure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing schedule.
Fax Archive and Forwarding Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and congure basic settings for
each:
● Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to an
email address, a network folder, or an FTP server.
● Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a different fax device.
Fax Activity Log Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this printer.
Supplies tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Supplies tab.
124
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Table 8-6 HP Embedded Web Server Supplies tab
Menu Description
Manage Supplies Congure how the printer reacts when supplies reach a Very Low state.
Troubleshooting tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Troubleshooting tab.
Table 8-7 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab
Menu Description
General Troubleshooting Use the following options as appropriate:
● Reports and Tests area: Select and print several types of reports and tests.
Some reports can be viewed in the EWS by clicking the View button.
● Fax Tools area: Congure settings for fax troubleshooting. (MFP and Digital
Sender products with HP analog fax accessory only)
● OXPd Troubleshooting area: Enable or disable the Allow a Non-Secure
Connection for Web Services option
● Auto Recovery area: Enable or disable the Enable Auto Recovery option, which
allows the printer to auto recover from errors that might require the power to be
turned off and on (for example, a 49 error).
Online Help Link to HP cloud-based online help to assist in troubleshooting printing issues.
Debug Data Conguration Customize the type and amount of data to capture in debug information les.
Diagnostic Data
NOTE: This item is available only if an
administrator password is set from the
Security tab.
Export printer information to a le that can be useful for HP technical support to use
for detailed problem analysis.
Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to factory defaults.
Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer rmware upgrade les.
Scheduled Restart Restart the printer at the frequency or time specied.
Security tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Security tab.
Troubleshooting tab
125
Table 8-8 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab
Menu Description
General Security Settings for general security, including the following:
● Congure an administrator password to restrict access to certain features on
the printer.
● Set a custom device Service Access Code.
● Set PJL password for processing PJL commands.
● Set le system access and rmware upgrade security.
● Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB connectivity
port on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.
● View the status of all security settings.
Account Policy
Enable administrator account settings.
Access Control Congure access to printer functions for specic individuals or groups, and select the
method individuals use to sign in to the printer.
Protect Stored Data Congure and manage the internal storage for the printer.
Congure settings for jobs that are stored on the printer internal storage.
Manage Remote Apps Manage or whitelist remote apps by importing or deleting certicates that allow
devices to use this product.
Certicate Management Install and manage security certicates for access to the printer and the network.
Email Domain Restriction If email functionality is enabled, administrators can limit the email addresses to which
the printer can send messages.
Web Service Security Allow resources on this printer to be accessed by web pages from different domains.
If no sites are added to the list, then all sites are trusted.
Security Log Export security event log data to a le that can be used for detailed problem analysis.
Self Test Verify that the security functions are running according to expected system
parameters.
HP Web Services tab
Settings available on the HP Web Services tab of the EWS.
Use the HP Web Services tab to congure and enable HP Web Services for this printer. HP Web Services
must be enabled to use mobile printing features.
Table 8-9
HP Embedded Web Server HP Web Services tab
Menu Description
Web Services Setup Connect this printer to HP Connected on the web by enabling HP Web Services.
Web Proxy Congure a proxy server if there are issues enabling HP Web Services or connecting
the printer to the Internet.
Smart Cloud Print Enable Smart Cloud Print, which allows access to web-based apps that extend the
capabilities of the printer.
126 Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Networking tab
Use the Networking tab to congure and secure network settings for the printer when it is connected to
an IP-based network. This tab does not display if the printer is connected to other types of networks.
Table 8-10 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Conguration settings
Menu Description
Wireless Station Congure the initial wireless settings.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
Wi-Fi Direct Congure Wi-Fi Direct settings for printers that include embedded Wi-Fi Direct Print
and NFC printing or that have a wireless accessory installed.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
TCP/IP Settings Congure TCP/IP settings for IPv4 and IPv6 networks.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
Network Settings Congure IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC, and SNMP settings, depending on the print
server model.
Other Settings Congure general printing protocols and services supported by the print server. The
available options depend on the print server model, but can include rmware update,
LPD queues, USB settings, support information, and refresh rate.
AirPrint Enable, set up, or disable network printing from Apple-supported printers.
Select Language Change the language displayed by the HP Embedded Web Server. This page displays
if the web pages support multiple languages. Optionally, select supported languages
through language-preference settings in the browser.
Web Proxy Enter the Web Proxy server settings for your network, if required.
Table 8-11 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings
Menu Description
Settings View and restore current security settings to factory-default values.
Congure security settings using the Security Conguration Wizard.
NOTE: Do not use the Security Conguration Wizard to congure security settings if
using network-management applications, such as HP Web Jetadmin.
Secure Communication Congure Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol and encryption options.
Mgmt. Protocols Congure and manage security protocols for this printer, including the following:
● Set the security management level for the HP Embedded Web Server, and
control trafc over HTTP and HTTPS.
● Congure the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) operation. Enable
or disable the SNMP v1/v2c or SNMP v3 agents on the print server.
● Control access through protocols that may not be secure, such as printing
protocols, print services, discovery protocols, name resolution services, and
conguration-management protocols.
Networking tab 127
Table 8-11 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings (continued)
Menu Description
802.1X Authentication Congure 802.1X authentication settings on the Jetdirect print server as required for
client authentication on the network, and reset the 802.1X authentication settings to
factory-default values.
CAUTION: When changing the 802.1X authentication settings; the printer might
lose its connection. To reconnect, it might be necessary to reset the print server to a
factory-default state and reinstall the printer.
IPsec/Firewall View or congure a Firewall policy or an IPsec/Firewall policy.
Announcement Agent Enable or disable the HP Device Announcement Agent, set the conguration server,
and congure mutual authentication using certicates.
Table 8-12 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Diagnostics settings
Menu Description
Network Statistics Display network statistics that are collected and stored on the HP Jetdirect print
server.
Protocol Info View a list of network-conguration settings on the HP Jetdirect print server for each
protocol.
Conguration Page View the HP Jetdirect conguration page, which contains status and conguration
information.
Congure IP network settings
Use the EWS to congure the printer network settings.
Printer sharing disclaimer
Review the following disclaimer.
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems
and not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.
View or change network settings
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to view or change IP conguration settings.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
128
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS
opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
2. Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. Change settings as needed.
Rename the printer on a network
To rename the printer on a network so that it can be uniquely identied, use the HP Embedded Web Server.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS
opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
2. Open the General tab.
3. On the Device Information page, the default printer name is in the Nickname eld. You can change
this name to uniquely identify this printer.
NOTE: Completing the other elds on this page is optional.
4. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Manually
congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Settings menus to manually set an IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. TCP/IP
Rename the printer on a network
129
d. IPV 4 Settings
e. Cong Method
3. Select the Manual option, and then touch the Save button.
4. Open the Manual Settings menu.
5. Touch the IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Default Gateway option.
6. Touch the rst eld to open a keypad. Enter the correct digits for the eld, and then touch the OK
button.
Repeat the process for each eld, and then touch the Save button.
Manually congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Settings menus to manually set an IPv6 address.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. To enable manual conguration, open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. TCP/IP
d. IPV6 Settings
3. Select Enable, and then select On.
4. Select the Enable Manual Settings option, and then touch the Done button.
5. To congure the address, open the Address menu, and then touch the eld to open a keypad.
6. Use the keypad to enter the address, and then touch the OK button.
7. Touch Save.
Link speed and duplex settings
Use the following steps to make changes to link speed and duplex settings.
NOTE: This information applies only to Ethernet networks. It does not apply to wireless networks.
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network hub. For most
situations, leave the printer in automatic mode. Incorrect changes to the link speed and duplex settings
might prevent the printer from communicating with other network devices. To make changes, use the
printer control panel.
NOTE: The printer setting must match the setting for the network device (a network hub, switch,
gateway, router, or computer).
NOTE: Making changes to these settings causes the printer to turn off and then on. Make changes only
when the printer is idle.
130
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. Link Speed
3. Select one of the following options:
● Auto: The print server automatically congures itself for the highest link speed and
communication mode allowed on the network.
● 10T Half: 10 megabytes per second (Mbps), half-duplex operation
● 10T Full: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
● 10T Auto: 10 Mbps, automatic-duplex operation
● 100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
● 100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
● 100TX Auto: 100 Mbps, automatic-duplex operation
● 1000T Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation
4. Touch the Save button. The printer turns off and then on.
Printer security features
Restrict who has access to conguration settings, secure data, and prevent access to valuable hardware
components.
Introduction
The printer includes several security features to restrict who has access to conguration settings, to
secure data, and to prevent access to valuable hardware components.
Security statements
Review this important security statement.
The printer supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the printer
secure, protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the
printer.
Assign an administrator password
Assign an administrator password for access to the printer and the HP Embedded Web Server so that
unauthorized users cannot change the printer settings.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to set the password
Use the following steps to set a password for the printer.
Printer security features
131
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then
touch the Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it
displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS
opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not
be safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the
computer.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Open the General Security menu.
4. In the area labeled Set the Local Administrator Password, enter the name to associate with the
password in the Username eld.
5. Enter the password in the New Password eld, and then enter it again in the Verify Password eld.
NOTE: To change an existing password, rst enter the existing password in the Old Password eld.
6. Click the Apply button.
IMPORTANT: Make note of the password and store it in a safe place. The administrator password
cannot be recovered. If the administrator password is lost or forgotten, contact HP Support for the
assistance required to completely reset the printer.
Click here to contact HP Support about resetting the printer password.
Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel
Use the following steps to sign into the control panel.
Some features on the printer control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use them.
When a feature is secured, the printer prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also sign in
without waiting for a prompt by selecting Sign In from the printer control panel.
Typically, the credentials for signing in to the printer are the same as for signing in to the network. Consult
the network administrator for this printer if you have questions about which credentials to use.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Sign In.
2. Follow the prompts to enter the credentials.
NOTE: To maintain security for the printer, select Sign Out when you have nished using the printer.
IP Security
IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network trafc to and from the printer. IPsec
provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.
132
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
For printers that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can congure
IPsec by using the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks
The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive data without
impacting printer performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and
has versatile time-saving features and robust functionality.
Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to congure the disk.
Lock the formatter
The formatter has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable.
Locking the formatter prevents someone from removing valuable components from it.
Energy-conservation settings
Learn about the energy-conservation settings that are available for the printer.
Print with EconoMode
This printer has an EconoMode option for printing drafts of documents. Using EconoMode can use less
toner. However, using EconoMode can also reduce print quality.
HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply
might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer
acceptable, consider replacing the toner cartridge.
NOTE: If this option is not available in the print driver, set it using the printer control panel.
Congure EconoMode from the printer control panel:
1. From the printer control panel, open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Default Print Options
c. Quality Level
3. Select EconoMode to enable the feature.
Set the sleep timer and
congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
The sleep settings affect how much power the printer uses, the wake/sleep time, how quickly the printer
enters sleep mode, and how quickly the printer wakes up from sleep mode.
To congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power while in sleep mode, enter the time for the Sleep
after Inactivity setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings icon.
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks
133
2. Open the following menus:
● General
● Energy Settings
● Sleep Settings
3. Select Sleep after Inactivity to specify the number of minutes the printer is inactive before it enters
sleep mode. Enter the appropriate time period.
4. Select Done to save the settings.
Set the sleep schedule
Use the Sleep Schedule feature to congure the printer to automatically wake or go into Sleep mode at
specic times on specic days of the week.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Schedule
3. Select the New Event button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Event or Sleep
Event.
4. For a wake or sleep event, congure the time and the days of the week for the event. Select Save to
save the setting.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for efciently managing a wide variety of
networked HP products, including printers, multifunction printers, and digital senders. This single solution
allows you to remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot, and secure your printing and imaging
environment — ultimately increasing business productivity by helping you save time, control costs, and
protect your investment.
HP Web Jetadmin upgrades are periodically made available to provide support for specic product
features. Go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin for more information.
Software and
rmware updates
HP regularly updates features that are available in the printer rmware. To take advantage of the most
current features, update the printer rmware.
Download the most recent rmware update le from the web:
Go to www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP. Click Software, Drivers and Firmware.
134
Chapter 8 Manage the printer
Solve problems9
Troubleshoot problems with the printer. Locate additional resources for help and technical support.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
● Install and congure
● Learn and use
● Solve problems
● Download software and rmware updates
● Join support forums
● Find warranty and regulatory information
Customer support
Find support contact options for your HP printer.
Table 9-1
Customer support options
Support option Location
Get telephone support for your country/
region.
Have the printer name, serial number,
date of purchase, and problem
description ready.
Country/region phone numbers are on the yer that was in the box with the printer or
at support.hp.com.
Get 24-hour Internet support, and
download software utilities and drivers.
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP
Order additional HP service or
maintenance agreements.
www.hp.com/go/carepack
Register the printer. www.register.hp.com
Control panel help system
The printer has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch
the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Solve problems
135
Figure 9-1 Control panel Help
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specic topics. You can
browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
Some Help screens include animations that show specic procedures, such as clearing paper jams.
If the printer alerts of an error or warning, touch the Help button to open a message that describes the
problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.
Reset factory settings
Resetting the printer settings to the factory-set defaults can help resolve problems.
Introduction
Use one of the following methods to reset the printer settings to the original settings from the factory.
Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel
Use the printer control panel to restore the settings to their original values.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Reset Factory Settings
3. Select Reset.
A verication message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data.
4. Select Reset to complete the process.
NOTE: The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server
(network-connected printers only)
Use the HP EWS to reset the printer settings to the original settings.
1. On the printer control panel, select the Information button , and then select the Network icon to
display the IP address or host name.
136
Chapter 9 Solve problems
2. Open the General tab.
3. On the left side of the screen, click Reset Factory Settings.
4. Click the Reset button.
NOTE: The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message
displays on the printer control panel or EWS
Review the possible solutions to this issue.
Cartridge is low: The printer indicates when a toner cartridge level is low. Actual toner cartridge life
remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer
acceptable. The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now.
Continue printing with the current cartridge until redistributing the toner no longer yields acceptable print
quality. To redistribute the toner, remove the toner cartridge from the printer and gently rock the cartridge
back and forth end to end. Reinsert the toner cartridge into the printer and close the cover.
Cartridge is very low: The printer indicates when the toner cartridge level is very low. Actual toner
cartridge life remaining may vary. To extend the life of the toner, gently rock the cartridges back and forth
end to end. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
HP’s Premium Protection Warranty expires when a message indicating that HP's Premium Protection
Warranty on this supply has ended appears on the Supplies Status Page or the EWS.
Change the “Very Low” settings
You can change the way the printer reacts when supplies reach the Very Low state. You do not have to
re-establish these settings when you install a new cartridge.
Change the “Very Low” settings at the control panel
Change the setting at the printer control panel.
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel or EWS
137
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Very Low Behavior
c. Black Cartridge or Color Cartridges
3. Select one of the following options:
● Select the Stop option to set the printer to stop printing when the cartridge reaches the Very Low
threshold.
● Select the Prompt to continue option to set the printer to stop printing when the cartridge
reaches the Very Low threshold. You can acknowledge the prompt or replace the cartridge to
resume printing.
● Select the Continue option to set the printer to alert you that the cartridge is very low,
and to continue printing beyond the Very Low setting without interaction. This can result in
unsatisfactory print quality.
For printers with fax capability
When the printer is set to the Stop or Prompt to continue option, there is some risk that faxes will not print
when the printer resumes printing. This can occur if the printer has received more faxes than the memory
can hold while the printer is waiting.
The printer can print faxes without interruption when it passes the Very Low threshold if you select the
Continue option for the cartridge, but print quality might degrade.
Order supplies
Order supplies and paper for your HP printer.
Table 9-2
Ordering options
Ordering option Ordering information
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter the printer IP
address or host name in the address/URL eld. The EWS contains a link to the
HP website, which provides options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
Use this information if the printer is not picking up paper from the tray or is picking up multiple sheets of
paper at one time.
Introduction
The following solutions can help solve problems if the printer is not picking up paper from the tray or is
picking up multiple sheets of paper at one time. Either of these situations can result in paper jams.
138
Chapter 9 Solve problems
The printer does not pick up paper
If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions:
1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper. Verify that no torn remnants of paper
remain inside the printer.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.
4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
to the appropriate indentation in the tray. The arrow on the tray guide should line up exactly with the
marking on the tray.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
The following images show examples of the paper-size indentations in the trays for various printers.
Most HP printers have markings similar to these.
Figure 9-2 Size markings for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
Figure 9-3 Size markings for cassette trays
A6
A5
A4
LTR/LGL
JIS B5
EXEC
A5
EXEC
A4
LTR/LGL
JIS B5
A4 B5
A5
11
10.5
A4
11 10.5
B5
The printer does not pick up paper
139
5. Verify that the humidity in the room is within specications for this printer and that paper is being
stored in unopened packages. Most reams of paper are sold in moisture-proof wrapping to keep
paper dry.
In high-humidity environments, paper at the top of the stack in the tray can absorb moisture, and it
might have a wavy or uneven appearance. If this happens, remove the top 5 to 10 sheets of paper
from the stack.
In low-humidity environments, excess static electricity can cause sheets of paper to stick together. If
this happens, remove the paper from the tray, and ex the stack by holding it at each end and bringing
the ends up to form a U shape. Then, rotate the ends down to reverse the U shape. Next, hold each
side of the stack of paper and repeat this process. This process releases individual sheets without
introducing static electricity. Straighten the paper stack against a table before returning it to the tray.
Figure 9-4 Technique for exing the paper stack
1
2
6. Check the printer control panel to see if it is displaying a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load
paper, and continue.
7. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened
with warm water. Use distilled water, if it is available.
CAUTION: Do not spray water directly onto the printer. Instead, spray water on the cloth or dab the
cloth in water and wring it out before cleaning the rollers.
The following image shows examples of the roller location for various printers.
Figure 9-5 Roller locations for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions:
140
Chapter 9 Solve problems
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and ex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and ip it over. Do not fan
the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
NOTE: Fanning the paper introduces static electricity. Instead of fanning the paper, ex the stack
by holding it at each end and bringing the ends up to form a U shape. Then, rotate the ends down to
reverse the U shape. Next, hold each side of the stack of paper and repeat this process. This process
releases individual sheets without introducing static electricity. Straighten the paper stack against a
table before returning it to the tray.
Figure 9-6 Technique for exing the paper stack
1
2
2. Use only paper that meets HP specications for this printer.
3. Verify that the humidity in the room is within specications for this printer, and that paper is being
stored in unopened packages. Most reams of paper are sold in moisture-proof wrapping to keep paper
dry.
In high-humidity environments, paper at the top of the stack in the tray can absorb moisture, and it
might have a wavy or uneven appearance. If this happens, remove the top 5 to 10 sheets of paper
from the stack.
In low-humidity environments, excess static electricity can cause sheets of paper to stick together. If
this happens, remove the paper from the tray and ex the stack as described above.
4. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
5. Make sure the tray is not overlled by checking the stack-height markings inside the tray. If it is
overlled, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of
the paper to the tray.
The following examples show the stack-height markings in the trays for various printers. Most HP
printers have markings similar to these. Also make sure that all sheets of paper are below the tabs
near the stack-height marks. These tabs help hold the paper in the correct position as it enters the
printer.
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
141
Figure 9-7 Stack-height markings
Figure 9-8 Tab for the paper stack
6. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
to the appropriate indentation in the tray. The arrow on the tray guide should line up exactly with the
marking on the tray.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
The following images show examples of the paper-size indentations in the trays for various printers.
Most HP printers have markings similar to these.
142
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Figure 9-9 Size markings for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
Figure 9-10 Size markings for cassette trays
A6
A5
A4
LTR/LGL
JIS B5
EXEC
A5
EXEC
A4
LTR/LGL
JIS B5
A4 B5
A5
11
10.5
A4
11 10.5
B5
7. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specications.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper, try these solutions.
NOTE: This information applies to MFP printers only.
● The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be removed.
● Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is
closed.
● Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.
● The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center
the stack.
● The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that the
paper stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack.
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper
143
● The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages.
Make sure the paper stack ts below the guides in the input tray, and remove pages from the output
bin.
● Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.
● Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free
cloth moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.
● From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Supplies button. Check the
status of the document-feeder kit, and replace it if necessary.
Clear paper jams
Use the following procedures to clear paper jams.
NOTE: Images used might not reect your exact model and conguration.
Introduction
The following information includes instructions for clearing paper jams from the printer.
Paper jam locations
Learn about the paper jam locations.
Jam locations
1
5
3
2
4
6
Number
Description
1 Document feeder
2 Output bin
3 Tray 1
4 Tray 2
5 Toner cartridge access area
6 Fuser
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
Learn about printer jam clearing auto-navigation.
144
Chapter 9 Solve problems
The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control
panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all
steps in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper
jams
1. Use only paper that meets HP specications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overlled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the
stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides
so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed
sheets one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is congured correctly for the
paper type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specications.
31.13.yz Clear paper jams in the document feeder
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the document
feeder. When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in
clearing the jam.
When a jam occurs, the control panel displays a message and an animation that assists in clearing the
jam.
● 31.13.01 Jam in document feeder
● 31.13.02 Jam in document feeder
● 31.13.13 Jam in document feeder
1. Remove all paper from document feeder input tray.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
145
2. Open the document-feeder cover.
3. Gently remove any jammed paper.
4. Close the document-feeder cover.
5. Lift the document feeder.
146
Chapter 9 Solve problems
6. Remove any paper from inside the document feeder.
7. Close the document feeder.
8. Try the copy or scan job again.
9. If the error persists, ensure that the paper meets the document feeder (ADF) specications for the
printer.
10. Ensure that the input tray is not overloaded and that the tray guides are set to the correct size. Make
sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of the input tray when paper is loaded
31.13.yz Clear paper jams in the document feeder
147
in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel with the direction of travel into the
document feeder paper path.
NOTE: To avoid document feeder jams, to copy narrow documents, use the atbed scanner.
Remove all staples and paper clips from original documents. Do not feed damaged or wrinkled paper.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than
originals that are printed on plain paper.
IMPORTANT: Warning: Do not run labels through the automatic document feeder (ADF).
11. If the paper continues to jam, remove and clean the document feeder rollers.
a. Open the document-feeder jam access door.
Figure 9-11 Open the document-feeder jam access door
148
Chapter 9 Solve problems
b. Release the blue locking arm to drop the assembly down.
Figure 9-12 Release the blue locking arm
c. Ensure the roller kit is in the down position (callout 1) and then slide the roller toward the front of
the printer to remove it (callout 2).
Figure 9-13 Release the separation roller cover
1
2
d. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint-free cloth.
e. Reinstall the rollers in the document feeder and perform a copy job to test.
12. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D1 Jam in right door
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1
149
1. If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out.
2. If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray 1 and open the
toner access door by pressing toner cartridge door release button (callout 1) and opening the door
forward (callout 2).
1
2
3. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer by pulling it straight out.
4. Remove any and all paper found inside the printer.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print quality.
150
Chapter 9 Solve problems
a. Lift the green lever to open up the paper feed area.
b. Remove the paper by slowly pulling towards the back of the printer then out from inside.
c. Lift up the green registration access lever.
13.B2.D1 jam error in tray 1
151
d. Remove the paper by slowly pulling out from inside the printer.
5. Install the toner cartridge and close the access door.
6. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
7. Ensure that the paper guides are set to the correct paper size and the paper is loaded into tray 1
correctly without overlling the tray.
Circle callout: The inside of left guide shows paper max ll line.
8. Clean the pickup roller with a dampened lint-free cloth as needed.
a. Open the toner cartridge door.
152
Chapter 9 Solve problems
b. Clean the pickup roller with a dampened lint-free cloth as needed.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2. When a jam
occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.D2 Jam in right door. This message appears if there is an issue when pulling paper from tray 2.
1. Open tray 2.
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
153
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is not overlled and that the
paper guides are adjusted correctly.
3. Close tray 2.
4. If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 2, open the toner access door
by pressing the toner cartridge door release button (callout 1) and opening the door forward (callout
2).
1
2
5. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer by pulling it straight out.
154
Chapter 9 Solve problems
6. Remove any and all paper found inside the printer.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print quality.
a. Lift up the green registration access lever.
b. Remove the paper by slowly pulling out from inside the printer.
c. Lift the green lever to open up the paper feed area.
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
155
d. Remove the paper by slowly pulling towards the back of the printer then out from inside.
7. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
8. Ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper being
installed into the tray.
Figure 9-14 Adjust guides
9. Ensure the paper is not lled above the ll mark (line below 3 triangles). Remove any excess media.
156
Chapter 9 Solve problems
10. If the error persists, clean the tray pick, feed, and separation rollers.
a. Remove tray 2.
b. Remove the tray roller assembly.
Push the tab (callout 1) and drop and slide the rollers in the indicated direction to remove.
1
2
c. Clean the rollers with a dampened lint-free cloth.
d. Reinstall the roller by sliding them back onto the shaft.
13.B2.D2 jam error in tray 2
157
e. Install tray 2.
11. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A3 jam error in tray 3
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.
● 13.A3.A3 Jam in tray 3
● 13.A3.D3 Jam in tray 3
1. Open tray 3.
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is not overlled and that the
paper guides are adjusted correctly.
158
Chapter 9 Solve problems
3. If paper is stuck going up into the printer, try to grab it with two hands and pull slowly down to remove
it.
NOTE: If needed, remove the tray by pulling out and then lifting up out of the printer.
Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
4. Install and close the tray.
5. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
13.A3 jam error in tray 3
159
6. Ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper being
installed into the tray.
Figure 9-15 Adjust guides
7. Ensure the paper is not lled above the ll mark (line below 3 triangles). Remove any excess media.
8. If the error persists, clean the tray pick, feed, and separation rollers
a. Remove the paper tray cassette.
IMPORTANT: Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
160
Chapter 9 Solve problems
b. Remove the tray roller assembly.
Push the tab (callout 1) and drop and slide the rollers in the indicated direction to remove.
1
2
c. Clean the rollers with a dampen lint free cloth.
d. Reinstall the roller by sliding them back onto the shaft.
e. Install the tray.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A4 jam error in tray 4
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.
● 13.A4.A4 Jam in tray 4
● 13.A4.D4 Jam in tray 4
13.A4 jam error in tray 4
161
1. Open tray 4.
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is not overlled and that the
paper guides are adjusted correctly.
3. If paper is stuck going up into the printer, try to grab it with two hands and pull slowly down to remove
it.
NOTE: If needed, remove the tray by pulling out and then lifting up out of the printer. Then remove
the paper.
162
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
4. Install and close the tray.
5. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
6. Ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper being
installed into the tray.
Figure 9-16 Adjust guides
13.A4 jam error in tray 4
163
7. Ensure the paper is not lled above the ll mark (line below 3 triangles). Remove any excess media.
8. If the error persists, clean the tray pick, feed, and separation rollers
a. Remove the paper tray cassette.
IMPORTANT: Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
b. Remove the tray roller assembly.
Push the tab (callout 1) and drop and slide the rollers in the indicated direction to remove.
1
2
164
Chapter 9 Solve problems
c. Clean the rollers with a dampen lint free cloth.
d. Reinstall the roller by sliding them back onto the shaft.
e. Install the tray.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.A5 jam error in tray 5
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.
● 13.A5.A5 Jam in tray 5
● 13.A5.D5 Jam in tray 5
1. Open tray 5.
13.A5 jam error in tray 5
165
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is not overlled and that the
paper guides are adjusted correctly.
3. If paper is stuck going up into the printer, try to grab it with two hands and pull slowly down to remove
it.
NOTE: If needed, remove the tray by pulling out and then lifting up out of the printer.
Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
4. Install and close the tray.
166
Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
6. Ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper being
installed into the tray.
Figure 9-17 Adjust guides
7. Ensure the paper is not lled above the ll mark (line below 3 triangles). Remove any excess media.
8. If the error persists, clean the tray pick, feed, and separation rollers
a. Remove the paper tray cassette.
IMPORTANT: Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
13.A5 jam error in tray 5
167
b. Remove the tray roller assembly.
Push the tab (callout 1) and drop and slide the rollers in the indicated direction to remove.
1
2
c. Clean the rollers with a dampen lint free cloth.
d. Reinstall the roller by sliding them back onto the shaft.
e. Install the tray.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
168
Chapter 9 Solve problems
13.A6 jam error in tray 6
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.
● 13.A6.A6 Jam in tray 6
● 13.A6.D6 Jam in tray 6
1. Open tray 6.
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is not overlled and that the
paper guides are adjusted correctly.
13.A6 jam error in tray 6
169
3. If paper is stuck going up into the printer, try to grab it with two hands and pull slowly down to remove
it.
NOTE: If needed, remove the tray by pulling out and then lifting up out of the printer.
Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
4. Install and close the tray.
5. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
170
Chapter 9 Solve problems
6. Ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper being
installed into the tray.
Figure 9-18 Adjust guides
7. Ensure the paper is not lled above the ll mark (line below 3 triangles). Remove any excess media.
8. If the error persists, clean the tray pick, feed, and separation rollers
a. Remove the paper tray cassette.
IMPORTANT: Tray 2 shown as all paper cassette trays remove from the printer the same way.
13.A6 jam error in tray 6
171
b. Remove the tray roller assembly.
Push the tab (callout 1) and drop and slide the rollers in the indicated direction to remove.
1
2
c. Clean the rollers with a dampen lint free cloth.
d. Reinstall the roller by sliding them back onto the shaft.
e. Install the tray.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B2 jam error in top door
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in the lower-right door. When a jam occurs, the control
panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B2.yz Jam in top door.
y = A or D
z = Tray that paper was printing from.
172
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● 13.B2.FF Jam in top door
1. Open the toner access door by pressing the toner cartridge door release button (callout 1) and
opening the door forward (callout 2).
1
2
2. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer by pulling it straight out.
3. Remove any and all paper found inside the printer.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print quality.
13.B2 jam error in top door
173
a. Lift up the green registration access lever.
b. Remove the paper by slowly pulling out from inside the printer.
c. Lift the green lever to open up the paper feed area.
174
Chapter 9 Solve problems
d. Remove the paper by slowly pulling towards the back of the printer then out from inside.
4. Install the toner cartridge and close the access door.
5. Ensure that the tray width and length guides are set to the correct paper size for the paper tray being
used.
Figure 9-19 Adjust guides
6. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
7. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B4 jam error in rear door (fuser)
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B4.yz Jam in rear door.
y = A or D
13.B4 jam error in rear door (fuser)
175
z = Tray that paper was printing from.
● 13.B4.FF Jam in rear door.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling
it.
176
Chapter 9 Solve problems
3. Close the rear door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.B9 jam error in rear door (fuser)
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.B9.yz Jam in rear door
● 13.FF.yz Jam in rear door
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
13.B9 jam error in rear door (fuser)
177
1. Open the rear door.
2. Gently remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling
it.
178
Chapter 9 Solve problems
3. Close the rear door.
4. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
5. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.D3 jam error in duplexer
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.D3.yz Jam in right door
1. Pull the tray 2 completely out of the printer.
13.D3 jam error in duplexer
179
2. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper seen.
3. If no paper is found, lower the duplex path tray.
4. Remove paper from duplex path as needed.
180
Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. If no paper is found in the duplex tray area, open the rear door.
6. Gently remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling
it.
7. Close the rear door.
8. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
9. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
13.E1 jam error in output bin
Follow these troubleshooting steps in the order presented.
Recommended action for customers
Use the following procedure to clear jams in the output bin. When a jam occurs, the control panel might
display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.E1.yz Jam in output bin
13.E1 jam error in output bin
181
1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the leading edge and gently remove it.
2. Open the rear door.
3. Gently remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling
it.
4. Close the rear door.
182
Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. If the error persists, ensure the type and quality of the paper being used meets the HP specications
for the printer.
6. If the error persists, contact your HP-authorized service or support provider, or contact customer
support at www.hp.com/go/contactHP.
Resolving mono print quality problems
Use the information below to troubleshoot print-quality and image-quality problems on mono (black and
white) HP LaserJet Enterprise printers.
Introduction
The troubleshooting steps can help resolve the following defects:
● Blank pages
● Black pages
● Curled paper
● Dark or light bands
● Dark or light streaks
● Fuzzy print
● Gray background or dark print
● Light print
● Loose toner
● Missing toner
● Scattered dots of toner
● Skewed images
● Smears
● Streaks
Troubleshoot print quality
To resolve print-quality issues, try these steps in the order presented.
To troubleshoot specic image defects, see Troubleshoot image defects.
Update the printer
rmware
Try upgrading the printer rmware.
For instructions, go to www.hp.com/support.
Print from a different software program
Try printing from a different software program.
Resolving mono print quality problems
183
If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.
Check the paper-type setting for the print job
Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have smears,
fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner.
Check the paper type setting on the control panel
Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.
1. Open and close the paper tray.
2. Follow the control panel prompts to conrm or modify the paper type and size settings for the tray.
3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specications.
4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the environment.
a. Open the following menus:
i. Settings
ii. Copy/Print or Print
iii. Print Quality
iv. Adjust Paper Type
b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.
c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance setting.
5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)
Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the
OK button to print the job.
184
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. By default, the print driver displays the Copies & Pages menu. Open the menus drop-down list, and
then click the Finishing menu.
4. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
Check toner-cartridge status
Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the
status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page
The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
2. Select the Conguration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.
Step two: Check supplies status
Check the supplies status report as follows.
1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges and,
if applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The
supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached the
very low threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer
acceptable. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer
acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance parts,
the supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.
2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.
A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information on
identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Print a cleaning page
During the printing process paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and can
cause print-quality issues such as toner specks or spatter, smears, streaks, lines, or repeating marks.
Follow these steps to clean the printer paper path:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
Check the paper type setting (macOS)
185
2. Select the following menus:
a. Maintenance
b. Calibration/Cleaning
c. Cleaning Page
3. Select Print to print the page.
A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control panel. The cleaning process takes a few
minutes to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the cleaning process has nished. When it is
nished, discard the printed page.
Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges
Follow these steps to inspect each toner cartridge:
1. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.
2. Check the memory chip for damage.
3. Examine the surface of the green imaging drum.
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-
quality problems.
4. If you see any scratches, ngerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the toner
cartridge.
5. Reinstall the toner cartridge and print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.
Check paper and the printing environment
Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specications
Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specications.
● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.
● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles,
voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.
● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.
● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in
Inkjet printers.
● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.
Step two: Check the environment
The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-feeding
issues. Try the following solutions:
● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning vents.
186
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specications.
● Do not place the printer in a conned space, such as a cabinet.
● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.
● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air ow on all
sides, including the top.
● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave residue
inside the printer.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when
printing from specic trays.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Print Quality
c. Image Registration
3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.
4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.
5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.
6. Select Done to save the new settings.
Try a different print driver
Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have unexpected
lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
Download a different print driver from the HP support Web site: www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP.
Check the EconoMode settings
HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply
might outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer
acceptable, consider replacing the toner cartridge.
NOTE: This feature is available with the PCL 6 print driver for Windows. If you are not using that driver,
you can enable the feature by using the HP Embedded Web Server.
Follow these steps if the entire page is too dark or too light.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and locate the Print Quality area.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
187
4. If the entire page is too dark, use these settings:
● Select the 600 dpi option, if available.
● Select the EconoMode check box to enable it.
If the entire page is too light, use these settings:
● Select the FastRes 1200 option, if available.
● Clear the EconoMode check box to disable it.
5. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog, click the OK
button to print the job.
Adjust print density
Complete the following steps to adjust the print density.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Print Quality
c. Toner Density
3. Move the slider toward either Less or More to the desired density setting.
Troubleshoot image defects
Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.
Table 9-3
Image defects table quick reference
Sample Description Possible solutions
Table 9-10 Light print on page 193 Table 9-8 Gray background or dark print
on page 192
Table 9-6 Blank page — No print on page
191
188 Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-3 Image defects table quick reference (continued)
Sample Description Possible solutions
Table 9-5 Black page on page 190 Table 9-4 Banding defects on page 190 Table 9-12 Streak defects on page 194
Table 9-7 Fixing/fuser defects on page
191
Table 9-9 Image placement defects on
page 192
Table 9-11 Output defects on page 193
Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps
as a starting point for solving image defect issues.
1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely
with continued printing.
2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has passed
the rated life), replace the cartridge.
3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray. Try
using a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.
4. Make sure that the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.
Troubleshoot image defects
189
5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See support.hp.com for
a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.
NOTE: The term “fusing” refers to the part of the printing process where toner is afxed to paper.
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer short edge rst.
Table 9-4 Banding defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark or light lines which repeat down
the length of the page, and are wide-
pitch and/or impulse bands. They might
be sharp or soft in nature. The defect
displays only in areas of ll, not in text or
sections with no printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Try printing from another tray.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. Use a different paper type.
5. Enterprise models only: From the
Home screen on the printer control
panel, go to the Adjust Paper Types
menu, and then choose a print
mode that is designed for a slightly
heavier media than what you are
using. This slows the print speed
and might improve the print quality.
6. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-5 Black page
Sample Description Possible solutions
The entire printed page is black.
1. Visually inspect the cartridge to
check for damage.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
190 Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-6 Blank page — No print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The page is completely blank and
contains no printed content.
1. Make sure that the cartridges are
genuine HP cartridges.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Print with a different cartridge.
4. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
lighter paper type.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-7 Fixing/fuser defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Slight shadows or offsets of the image
are repeated down the page. The
repeated image might fade with each
recurrence.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
lighter weight paper type.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Toner rubs off along either edge of the
page. This defect is more common at the
edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light
media types, but can occur anywhere on
the page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Check the paper type in the paper
tray and adjust the printer settings
to match. If necessary, select a
heavier paper type.
3. Enterprise models only: From the
printer control panel, go to the
Edge-to-Edge menu and then select
Normal. Reprint the document.
4. Enterprise models only: From the
printer control panel, select Auto
Include Margins and then reprint the
document.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects
191
Table 9-8 Gray background or dark print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image or text is darker than expected
and/or the background is gray.
1. Make sure that the paper in the
trays has not already been run
through the printer.
2. Use a different paper type.
3. Reprint the document.
4. Mono models only: From the Home
screen on the printer control panel,
go to the Adjust Toner Density menu,
and then adjust the toner density to
a lower level.
5. Make sure that the printer is
within the supported operating
temperature and humidity range.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-9 Image placement defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image is not centered, or is skewed
on the page. The defect occurs when the
paper is not positioned properly as it is
pulled from the tray and moves through
the paper path.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the paper and then reload
the tray. Make sure that all the paper
edges are even on all sides.
3. Make sure that the top of the paper
stack is below the tray-full indicator.
Do not overll the tray.
4. Make sure that the paper guides
are adjusted to the correct size
for the paper. Do not adjust the
paper guides tightly against the
paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
192
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-10 Light print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The printed content is light or faded on
the entire page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then
shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.
3. Mono models only: Make sure that
the EconoMode setting is disabled,
both at the printer control panel and
in the print driver.
4. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
5. Print a Supplies Status Page and
check the life and usage of the
cartridge.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-11 Output defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Printed pages have curled edges. The
curled edge can be along the short or
long side of the paper. Two types of curl
are possible:
● Positive curl: The paper curls
toward the printed side. The defect
occurs in dry environments or when
printing high-coverage pages.
● Negative curl: The paper curls
away from the printed side. The
defect occurs in high-humidity
environments or when printing low-
coverage pages.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Positive curl: From the printer
control panel, select a heavier
paper type. The heavier paper type
creates a higher temperature for
printing.
Negative curl: From the printer
control panel, select a lighter paper
type. The lighter paper type creates
a lower temperature for printing.
Try storing the paper in a dry
environment prior to use, or use
freshly opened paper.
3. Print in duplex mode.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Troubleshoot image defects
193
Table 9-11 Output defects (continued)
Sample Description Possible solutions
The paper does not stack well in the
output tray. The stack might be uneven,
skewed, or the pages might be pushed
out of the tray and onto the oor. Any of
the following conditions can cause this
defect:
● Extreme paper curl
● The paper in the tray is wrinkled or
deformed
● The paper is a non-standard paper
type, such as envelopes
● The output tray is too full
1.
Reprint the document.
2. Extend the output bin extension.
3. If the defect is caused by
extreme paper curl, refer to the
troubleshooting steps for "Output
curl."
4. Use a different paper type.
5. Use freshly opened paper.
6. Remove the paper from the output
tray before the tray gets too full.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-12 Streak defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Light vertical streaks that usually span
the length of the page. The defect
displays only in areas of ll, not in text or
sections with no printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then
shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
NOTE: Both light and dark vertical
streaks can occur when the printing
environment is outside the
specied
range for temperature or humidity. Refer
to your printer's environmental
specications for allowable temperature
and humidity levels.
194
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Table 9-12 Streak defects (continued)
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark vertical lines which occur down the
length of the page. The defect might
occur anywhere on the page, in areas of
ll or in sections with no printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then
shake it to redistribute the toner.
Reinsert the toner cartridges into
the printer and close the cover. For
a graphical representation of this
procedure, see Replace the toner
cartridges.
3. Print a cleaning page.
4. Check the toner level in the
cartridge.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Improve copy image quality
If the printer is having copy quality problems, try the following solutions in the order presented to resolve
the issue.
Try these few simple steps rst:
● Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
● Use high-quality originals.
● When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the
paper guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print
quality” for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and atbed glass.
Improve copy image quality
195
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
1
2
3
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride
on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or
platen. They might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be
sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
196
Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. Close the scanner lid.
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Calibrate the scanner
Calibration is a process that optimizes scan quality.
NOTE: When using the document feeder, make sure to adjust the guides in the input tray so they are
against the original document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Support Tools application, and
then select the Support Tools icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Maintenance
b. Calibration/Cleaning
c. Calibrate Scanner
3. Touch the Start button to start the calibration process. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Calibrate the scanner
197
4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try copying again.
Check the paper settings
Follow these steps if copied pages have smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, or areas where pigment
has dropped out.
Check the paper selection options
Use the following steps to check the paper selection options.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select
the Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then scroll to and select Paper Selection.
3. Select Paper size, and then select one of the predened options.
4. Select Paper type, and then select one of the predened options.
5. Select Paper tray, and then select one of the predened options.
6. Select Done to save the paper selection options.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Copy menu to optimize image quality.
● Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text
appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
● Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
● Contrast: Increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if
the original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without
affecting the darkness of the image.
● Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select
the Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then scroll to and select Image Adjustment.
3. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and select Done.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures
Optimize the copy job for the type of image being copied: text, graphics, or photos.
198
Chapter 9 Solve problems
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select
the Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Optimize Text/Picture.
3. Select one of the predened options.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Edge-to-edge copying
Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document
is printed close to the edges.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select
the Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Edge-To-Edge.
3. Select the Edge-To-Edge output option if the original document is printed close to the paper edges.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
Improve scan image quality
Try the following basic solutions to improve scanned image quality.
● Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
● Use high-quality originals.
● When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the
paper guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print
quality” for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and atbed glass.
Edge-to-edge copying
199
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
1
2
3
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride
on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or
platen. They might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be
sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
200
Chapter 9 Solve problems
5. Close the scanner lid.
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Check the resolution settings
Follow these steps to adjust the resolution setting. Setting the resolution to a high value increases the le
size and the scan time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select
the Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select File Type and Resolution.
Check the resolution settings
201
4. Select one of the predened Resolution options, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
Check the color settings
Follow these steps to adjust the color setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select
the Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Save to Device Memory
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Touch the Options button.
4. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Color/Black.
5. Select one of the predened options.
6. Touch the Send button.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Scan menu to optimize image quality.
● Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text
appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
● Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
● Contrast: Increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if
the original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without
affecting the darkness of the image.
● Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select
the Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
202
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Scan to Job Storage
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select Image Adjustment.
4. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures
Optimize the scan job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select
the Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
● Scan to Job Storage
● Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select Optimize Text/Picture.
4. Select one of the predened options.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Check the output-quality settings
This setting adjusts the level of compression when saving the le. For the highest quality, select the
highest setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select
the Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
● Scan to Email
● Scan to Network Folder
● Scan to USB Drive
● Scan to SharePoint®
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures
203
3. Select Options, and then select File Type and Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened Quality and File Size options, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
Improve fax image quality
If the printer is having fax quality problems, try the following solutions in the order presented to resolve the
issue.
Try these few simple steps rst:
● Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
● Use high-quality originals.
● When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the
paper guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print
quality” for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Learn about solving copy-quality debris problems.
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and document feeder white plastic
backing, which might cause print defects. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed
pages have streaks, unwanted lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
View a video of cleaning the document feeder glass and atbed glass.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
204
Chapter 9 Solve problems
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a soft
cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
1
2
3
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride
on any part of the printer; these can damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or
platen. They might seep and damage the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on copies when you are using the document feeder, be
sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
205
5. Close the scanner lid.
6. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then press the power button to turn the printer on.
Check the send-fax resolution settings
Adjust the resolution of outgoing faxes as needed. A higher resolution setting increases the fax size and
send time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select
the Fax icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened options, and then select Send to send the fax.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Fax menu to optimize image quality.
206
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text
appear crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
● Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
● Contrast: Increase or decrease the difference between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
● Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if
the original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without
affecting the darkness of the image.
● Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select
the Fax icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Image Adjustment.
4. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and then select Done.
5. Select Send to send the fax.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures
Optimize the fax job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select
the Fax icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Optimize Text/Picture.
4. Select one of the predened options.
5. Select Send to send the fax.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default
settings.
Check the error-correction setting
Make sure the Error Correction Mode setting is enabled. This setting can improve image quality.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures
207
c. General Fax Send Settings
3. Select the Error Correction Mode option. Touch the Done button.
Check the t-to-page setting
If the Fit to Page setting is enabled, and the incoming fax is larger than the default page size, the printer
attempts to scale the image to t the page. If this setting is disabled, larger images split across multiple
pages.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then
select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Default Job Options
d. Fit to Page
3. Select the On option to enable the setting, or select the Off option to disable it.
Send to a different fax machine
The problem might be related to fax machine settings or supplies status.
Try sending the fax to a different fax machine. If the fax quality is better, the problem is related to the initial
recipient's fax machine settings or supplies status.
Check the sender's fax machine
Try the following to check the sender's fax machine.
Ask the sender to try sending from a different fax machine. If the fax quality is better, the problem is with
the sender's fax machine. If a different fax machine is unavailable, ask the sender to consider making the
following changes:
● Make sure the original document is on white (not colored) paper.
● Increase the fax resolution, quality level, or contrast settings.
● If possible, send the fax from a computer software program.
Solve wired network problems
Check the following information to resolve wired network issues.
Introduction
Certain types of problems can indicate there is a network communication problem. These problems
include the following issues:
208
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Poor physical connection
Check the cable connections.
1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity
light ashes indicating network trafc, and the green link-status light is continuously lit indicating a
network link.
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
Verify that the printer is communicating with the network and your computer.
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the printer, and the computer are all congured for the same network (also known as
subnet).
3. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer is
selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer conguration page.
4. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to
this printer, even if its IP address changes.
5. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the printer’s hostname instead
of the IP address.
6. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.
7. Reinstall the printer software and driver.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these
settings, you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.
Poor physical connection
209
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
An incorrectly congured computer can cause issues with printing.
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is congured correctly.
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Check the network settings.
1. Review the printer’s conguration/networking pages to check the status of the network settings and
protocols.
2. Recongure the network settings if necessary.
Solve wireless network problems
Check the following information to resolve wireless network issues.
Introduction
Use the troubleshooting information to help resolve issues.
NOTE: To determine whether HP NFC, Wi-Fi, BLE, or other wireless printing capabilities are enabled on
the printer, print a conguration page from the printer control panel.
NOTE: If you have been experiencing intermittent loss of network connectivity, rst update the printer
rmware. For instructions on how to update the printer rmware, go to http://support.hp.com, search for
your printer, and then search on “update the rmware.”
Wireless connectivity checklist
Use the checklist to help resolve wireless connection issues.
● For printers that do not support simultaneous wired and wireless connections, verify that the network
cable is not connected.
● Verify that the printer and the wireless router are turned on and have power. Also make sure that the
wireless radio in the printer is turned on. (The wireless network indicator is solid when the printer is
connected to a wireless network, and blinking when it is searching for a wireless network.)
● Verify that the service set identier (SSID) is correct:
– For a wireless connection to your network, conrm that your mobile device is connecting to the
correct router/access point.
– For a Wi-Fi Direct connection, print a conguration page to determine the printer’s SSID.
If you are not sure that the SSID is correct, run the wireless setup again.
● With secured networks, verify that the security information is correct. If the security information is
incorrect, run the wireless setup again.
● If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on the wireless network. If
the network has Internet access, try connecting to the Internet over a wireless connection.
210
Chapter 9 Solve problems
● Verify that the encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the printer as it is for the wireless
access point (on networks using WPA security).
● Verify that the printer is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the printer must
be within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point (wireless router).
● Verify that obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the
access point and the printer. Make sure poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete
do not separate the printer and wireless access point.
● Verify that the printer is located away from electronic devices that might interfere with the wireless
signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including motors, cordless phones, security
system cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.
● For computers connecting to the wireless printer:
– Verify that the print driver is installed on the computer.
– Verify that you have selected the correct printer port.
– Verify that the computer and printer connect to the same wireless network.
– If your environment has multiple wireless signals and you need the printer to support dual band
networks on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz, install the HP Jetdirect 2900nw print server accessory.
– For macOS, verify that the wireless router supports Bonjour.
The printer does not print after the wireless
conguration completes
Resolve issues between your computer and the printer.
1. Make sure that the printer is turned on and in the ready state.
2. Turn off any third-party rewalls on your computer.
3. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
4. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer.
5. Verify that you can open the printer HP Embedded Web Server from a computer on the network.
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party
rewall installed
Verify that a rewall is not interfering with wireless communication.
1. Update the rewall with the most recent update available from the manufacturer.
2. If programs request rewall access when you install the printer or try to print, make sure that you
allow the programs to run.
3. Temporarily turn off the rewall, and then install the wireless printer on the computer. Enable the
rewall when you have completed the wireless installation.
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or
printer
Verify that the printer and network settings are correct.
The printer does not print after the wireless
conguration completes 211
1. Make sure that the router or printer connects to the same network that your computer connects to.
2. Print a conguration page.
3. Compare the service set identier (SSID) on the conguration page to the SSID in the printer
conguration for the computer.
4. If the numbers are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Recongure
the wireless setup for the printer.
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer
Complete the following steps to solve connection issues.
1. Make sure that the other computers are within the wireless range and that no obstacles block the
signal. For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point.
2. Make sure that the printer is turned on and in the ready state.
3. Make sure there are not more than 5 concurrent Wireless Print Direct users.
4. Turn off any third-party rewalls on your computer.
5. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
6. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer.
The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN
Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time.
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list
Follow these steps when the network does not appear in the wireless network list on your computer or
mobile device.
● Make sure the wireless router is turned on and has power.
● The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden network. Make sure the
router/access point is advertising the SSID by checking for its SSID in the available networks seen by
your mobile device.
The wireless network is not functioning
Complete the following steps to ensure that the network is functioning correctly.
1. For printers that do not support simultaneous wired and wireless connections, make sure that the
network cable is disconnected.
2. To verify if the network has lost communication, try connecting other devices to the network.
3. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
212
Chapter 9 Solve problems
b. Type ping followed by the router IP address.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
4. Make sure that the router or printer connects to the same network that the computer connects to.
a. Print a conguration page.
b. Compare the service set identier (SSID) on the conguration report to the SSID in the printer
conguration for the computer.
c. If the numbers are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network.
Recongure the wireless setup for the printer.
Reduce interference on a wireless network
The following tips can reduce interference in a wireless network:
● Keep the wireless devices away from large metal objects, such as ling cabinets, and other
electromagnetic devices, such as microwaves and cordless telephones. These objects can disrupt
radio signals.
● Keep the wireless devices away from large masonry structures and other building structures. These
objects can absorb radio waves and lower signal strength.
● Position the wireless router in a central location in line of sight with the wireless printers on the
network.
Solve fax problems
Use the following sections to solve issues involving the printer fax functions.
Checklist for solving fax problems
Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax-related problems you encounter:
● Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has been tested
with the supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specications. Do not substitute another
fax cable; the analog-fax accessory requires an analog-fax cable. It also requires an analog phone
connection.
● Is the fax/phone line connector seated in the outlet on the fax accessory? Make sure that the
phone jack is correctly seated in the outlet. Insert the connector into the outlet until it "clicks."
NOTE: Verify that the phone jack is connected to the fax port rather than to the network port. The
ports are similar.
● Is the phone wall jack working properly? Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the
wall jack. Can you hear a dial tone, and can you make or receive a phone call?
What type of phone line are you using?
Verify the type of phone line you are using, and review the recommendations for that type of line.
Reduce interference on a wireless network
213
● Dedicated line: A standard analog fax/phone line assigned to receive or send faxes.
NOTE: The phone line should be for printer fax use only and not shared with other types of
telephone devices. Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notications to a
monitoring company.
● PBX system: A business-environment phone system. Standard home phones and the fax accessory
use an analog phone signal. Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax
accessory. You might need an interfacing Analog Telephone Adapter (ATA) to connect the fax machine
to digital PBX systems.
● Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where a new call "rolls over" to the next available line when the
rst incoming line is busy. Try attaching the printer to the rst incoming phone line. The fax accessory
answers the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings-to-answer setting.
Are you using a surge-protection device?
A surge-protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax
accessory against electrical power passed through the phone lines. These devices can cause some fax
communication problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal.
If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the
printer directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge-protection
device.
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?
If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the
fax accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes.
If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax
accessory answers all calls.
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
If the fax telephone line has an activated call-waiting feature, a call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in
progress, which causes a communication error.
Ensure that a call-waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line.
Check fax accessory status
If the analog-fax accessory does not appear to be functioning, print a Conguration Page report to check
the status.
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and select Reports.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Conguration/Status Pages
b. Conguration Page
3. Touch the Print button to print the report, or touch the View button to view the report on the screen.
The report consists of several pages.
NOTE: The printer IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page.
214
Chapter 9 Solve problems
4. On the Fax Accessory Page of the Conguration Page, under the Hardware Information heading,
check the Modem Status. The following table identies the status conditions and possible solutions.
NOTE: If the Fax Accessory Page does not print, there might be a problem with the analog fax
accessory. If you are using LAN fax or Internet fax, those congurations could be disabling the
feature.
Table 9-13 Analog-fax accessory troubleshooting
Status conditions Possible solutions
Operational / Enabled
1
The analog-fax accessory is installed and ready.
Operational / Disabled
1
The fax accessory is installed, but you have not congured
the required fax settings yet.
The fax accessory is installed and operational; however, the
HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the printer fax
feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled,
the analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature,
either LAN fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
NOTE: If LAN fax is enabled, the Scan to Fax feature is
unavailable on the printer control panel.
Non-Operational / Enabled/Disabled
1
The printer has detected a rmware failure. Upgrade the
rmware.
Damaged / Enabled/Disabled
1
The fax accessory has failed. Reseat the fax accessory
card and check for bent pins. If the status is still DAMAGED,
replace the analog-fax accessory card.
1 ENABLED indicates that the analog-fax accessory is enabled and turned on; DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled
(analog fax is turned off).
General fax problems
Learn about solutions for common fax problems.
The fax failed to send
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
JBIG is enabled, and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capability.
Turn off the JBIG setting.
No fax address book button displays
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
None of the contacts in the selected contacts list have fax information associated with them. Add the
necessary fax information.
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.
Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.
General fax problems
215
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled
This fax issue is a normal part of operation.
For all forwarded faxes, the printer appends the overlay header to the top of a page.
This is normal operation.
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box
This fax issue is a normal part of operation.
Names and numbers can both display, depending on where they are from. The fax address book lists
names, and all other databases list numbers.
This is normal operation.
A one-page fax prints as two pages
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.
To print a one page fax on a single page, set the overlay header to overlay mode, or adjust the t-to-page
setting.
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
A jam is in the document feeder.
Clear the jam, and send the fax again.
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
The volume setting needs to be adjusted.
Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu.
216
Chapter 9 Solve problems
Service and supportA
HP limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY*
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5601dn One-year, onsite warranty service
NOTE: *Warranty and support options vary by product, country, and local legal requirements. Go to
support.hp.com to learn about HP award-winning service and support options in your region.
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, this HP Limited Warranty applies only to HP branded products
sold or leased a) from HP Inc., its subsidiaries, afliates, authorized resellers, authorized distributors, or
country distributors; and, b) with this HP Limited Warranty, that HP hardware and accessories will be free
from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specied above.
If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or
replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in
performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date
of purchase, for the period specied above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly
installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace
software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable,
within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled
to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been
subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration,
(b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modication or misuse,
(d) operation outside of the published environmental specications for the product, or (e) improper site
preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND
HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states
or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or
exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specic legal rights and you might also have
other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province.
HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this
product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary
according to local standards. HP will not alter form, t or function of the product to make it operate in a
country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
Service and support
217
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
(INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
UK, Ireland, and Malta
The HP Limited Warranty is a commercial guarantee voluntarily provided by HP. The name and address
of the HP entity responsible for the performance of the HP Limited Warranty in your country/region is as
follows:
UK: HP Inc UK Limited, Earley West, 300 Thames Valley Park Drive, Reading, RG6 1PT, United Kingdom
Ireland: HP Technology Ireland Limited, Liffey Valley Ofce Campus, 1st FLOOR, BLOCK B Quarryvale, Co.
Dublin D22 X0Y3 Ireland
Malta: HP Europe B.V., Amsterdam, Meyrin Branch, Route du Nant-d'Avril 150, 1217 Meyrin, Switzerland
United Kingdom: The HP Limited Warranty benets apply in addition to any legal rights to
a guarantee from seller of nonconformity of goods with the contract of sale. These rights expire
six years from delivery of goods for products purchased in England or Wales and ve years from
delivery of goods for products purchased in Scotland. However various factors may impact your
eligibility to receive these rights. For further information, please consult the following link: Consumer
Legal Guarantee (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) or you may visit the European Consumer Centers
website (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-
consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Consumers have the right to choose
whether to claim service under the HP Limited Warranty or against the seller under the legal guarantee.
Ireland: The HP Limited Warranty benets apply in addition to any statutory rights from seller in
relation to nonconformity of goods with the contract of sale. However various factors may impact
your eligibility to receive these rights. Consumer statutory rights are not limited or affected in
any manner by HP Care Pack. For further information, please consult the following link: Consumer
Legal Guarantee (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) or you may visit the European Consumer Centers
website (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-
consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Consumers have the right to choose
whether to claim service under the HP Limited Warranty or against the seller under the legal guarantee.
Malta: The HP Limited Warranty benets apply in addition to any legal rights to a two-year guarantee
from seller of nonconformity of goods with the contract of sale; however various factors may
impact your eligibility to receive these rights. Consumer statutory rights are not limited or affected
in any manner by the HP Limited Warranty. For further information, please consult the following link:
Consumer Legal Guarantee (www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) or you may visit the European Consumer Centers
website (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-
consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Consumers have the right to choose
whether to claim service under the HP Limited Warranty or against the seller under two-year legal
guarantee.
218
Appendix A Service and support
Austria, Belgium, Germany, Luxemburg. and Switzerland
Die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie ist eine von HP auf freiwilliger Basis angebotene kommerzielle
Garantie. Der Name und die Adresse der HP Gesellschaft, die in Ihrem Land für die Gewährung der
beschränkten HP Herstellergarantie verantwortlich ist, sind wie folgt:
Schweiz: Die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie ist eine von HP auf freiwilliger Basis angebotene
kommerzielle Garantie. Der Name und die Adresse der HP Entität, die in Ihrem Land für die Gewährung der
beschränkten HP Herstellergarantie verantwortlich ist, sind wie folgt:
Deutschland: HP Deutschland GmbH, Schickardstr. 32, D-71034 Böblingen
Österreich: HP Austria GmbH., Technologiestrasse 5, A-1120 Wien
Luxemburg: HP Luxembourg S.C.A., 75, Parc d'Activités Capellen, L-8308 Capellen
Belgien: HP Belgium BV, Hermeslaan 1, Building B, B-1831 Diegem, Unternehmensnummer
0597.618.285
Schweiz: HP Schweiz GmbH, Glatt Tower, Neue Winterthurerstrasse 99, 8304 Wallisellen
Deutschland: Die Rechte aus der beschränkten HP Herstellergarantie gelten zusätzlich zu den
gesetzlichen Ansprüchen wegen Sachmängeln auf eine zweijährige Gewährleistung ab dem
Lieferdatum. Ob Sie Anspruch auf diese Rechte haben, hängt von zahlreichen Faktoren ab.
Die Rechte des Kunden sind in keiner Weise durch die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie
eingeschränkt bzw. betroffen. Weitere Hinweise nden Sie auf der folgenden Website:
Gewährleistungsansprüche für Verbraucher (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) oder Sie können die Website
des Europäischen Verbraucherzentrums (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net)
besuchen. Verbraucher haben das Recht zu wählen, ob sie eine Leistung von HP gemäß der beschränkten
HP Herstellergarantie in Anspruch nehmen oder ob sie sich gemäß der gesetzlichen zweijährigen Haftung
für Sachmängel (Gewährleistung) sich an den jeweiligen Verkäufer wenden.
Österreich, Luxemburg und Belgien: Die Rechte aus der beschränkten HP Herstellergarantie gelten
zusätzlich zu den gesetzlichen Ansprüchen wegen Sachmängeln auf eine zweijährige Gewährleistung
ab dem Lieferdatum. Ob Sie Anspruch auf diese Rechte haben, hängt von zahlreichen Faktoren
ab. Die Rechte des Kunden sind in keiner Weise durch die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie
eingeschränkt bzw. betroffen. Weitere Hinweise nden Sie auf der folgenden Website:
Gewährleistungsansprüche für Verbraucher (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) oder Sie können die Website
des Europäischen Verbraucherzentrums (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net)
besuchen. Verbraucher haben das Recht zu wählen, ob sie eine Leistung von HP gemäß der beschränkten
HP Herstellergarantie in Anspruch nehmen oder ob sie sich gemäß der gesetzlichen zweijährigen Haftung
für Sachmängel (Gewährleistung) sich an den jeweiligen Verkäufer wenden.
Schweiz: Die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie Vorteile gelten zusätzlich zu den rechtlichen
Gewährleistungsansprüchen bei fehlerhaften Produkten aus dem Kaufvertrag. Ob Sie Anspruch auf diese
Rechte haben, hängt von zahlreichen Faktoren ab. Die Rechte des Kunden sind in keiner Weise durch die
beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie eingeschränkt bzw. betroffen.
Verbraucher haben das Recht zu wählen, ob sie die beschränkte HP Herstellergarantie beanspruchen
wollen oder sich mit den Gewährleistungsansprüchen an den Verkäufer richten wollen
Belgium, France, Luxemburg, and Switzerland
La garantie limitée HP est une garantie commerciale fournie volontairement par HP. Voici les coordonnées
de l'entité HP responsable de l'exécution de la garantie limitée HP dans votre pays:
Austria, Belgium, Germany, Luxemburg. and Switzerland
219
France: HP France SAS, société par actions simpliée identiée sous le numéro 448 694 133 RCS
Nanterre, Meudon Campus Bât. 1, 14 rue de la Verrerie 92190 Meudon, tel. 09 69 32 04 35 (produits
des gammes grand public et gaming) ou 01 70 48 53 19 (produits de la gamme professionnelle). Autres
options de contact : WhatsApp et Messenger.
G.D. Luxembourg: HP Luxembourg S.C.A., 75, Parc d'Activités Capellen, L-8308 Capellen
Belgique: HP Belgium BV, Hermeslaan 1, Building B, B-1831 Diegem, numéro d’entreprise 0597.618.285
Suisse: HP Suisse Sàrl, Glatt Tower, Neue Winterthurerstrasse 99, 8304 Wallisellen
France: La Garantie Limitée HP s'applique sans préjudice du droit pour le consommateur de bénécier de
la garantie légale de conformité dans les conditions prévues aux articles L. 217-1 à L. 217-32 du code
de la consommation et de celle relative aux vices cachés dans les conditions prévues aux articles 1641
à 1649 du code civil. Le consommateur peut ainsi choisir d'exercer ses droits au titre de la Garantie
Limitée HP ou, auprès du vendeur, au titre des garanties légales dont les modalités de mises en œuvre
sont rappelées ci-dessous.
220
Appendix A Service and support
Le consommateur dispose d’un délai de deux ans à compter de la délivrance du bien pour obtenir la mise en oeuvre de la garantie
légale de conformité en cas d’apparition d’un défaut de conformité. Durant ce délai, le consommateur n’est tenu d’établir que
l’existence du défaut de conformité et non la date d’apparition de celui-ci.
Lorsque le contrat de vente du bien prévoit la fourniture d’un contenu numérique ou d’un service numérique de manière continue
pendant une durée supérieure à deux ans, la garantie légale est applicable à ce contenu numérique ou ce service numérique
tout au long de la période de fourniture prévue. Durant ce délai, le consommateur n’est tenu d’établir que l’existence du défaut de
conformité affectant le contenu numérique ou le service numérique et non la date d’apparition de celui-ci.
La garantie légale de conformité emporte obligation pour le professionnel, le cas échéant, de fournir toutes les mises à jour
nécessaires au maintien de la conformité du bien.
La garantie légale de conformité donne au consommateur droit à la réparation ou au remplacement du bien dans un délai de
trente jours suivant sa demande, sans frais et sans inconvénient majeur pour lui.
Si le bien est réparé dans le cadre de la garantie légale de conformité, le consommateur bénécie d’une extension de six mois de
la garantie initiale. Si le consommateur demande la réparation du bien, mais que le vendeur impose le remplacement, la garantie
légale de conformité est renouvelée pour une période de deux ans à compter de la date de remplacement du bien.
Le consommateur peut obtenir une réduction du prix d’achat en conservant le bien ou mettre n au contrat en se faisant
rembourser intégralement contre restitution du bien, si:
1° Le professionnel refuse de réparer ou de remplacer le bien;
2° La réparation ou le remplacement du bien intervient après un délai de trente jours;
3° La réparation ou le remplacement du bien occasionne un inconvénient majeur pour le consommateur, notamment lorsque
le consommateur supporte dénitivement les frais de reprise ou d’enlèvement du bien non conforme, ou s’il supporte les frais
d’installation du bien réparé ou de remplacement;
4° La non-conformité du bien persiste en dépit de la tentative de mise en conformité du vendeur restée infructueuse.
Le consommateur a également droit à une réduction du prix du bien ou à la résolution du contrat lorsque le défaut de conformité
est si grave qu’il
justie que la réduction du prix ou la résolution du contrat soit immédiate. Le consommateur n’est alors pas tenu
de demander la réparation ou le remplacement du bien au préalable.
Le consommateur n’a pas droit à la résolution de la vente si le défaut de conformité est mineur.
Toute période d’immobilisation du bien en vue de sa réparation ou de son remplacement suspend la garantie qui restait à courir
jusqu’à la délivrance du bien remis en état.
Les droits mentionnés ci-dessus résultent de l’application des articles L. 217-1 à L. 217-32 du code de la consommation.
Le vendeur qui fait obstacle de mauvaise foi à la mise en oeuvre de la garantie légale de conformité encourt une amende civile
d’un montant maximal de 300 000 euros, qui peut être porté jusqu’à 10 % du chiffre d’affaires moyen annuel (article L. 241-5 du
code de la consommation).
Le consommateur bénécie également de la garantie légale des vices cachés en application des articles 1641 à 1649 du code
civil, pendant une durée de deux ans à compter de la découverte du défaut. Cette garantie donne droit à une réduction de prix si le
bien est conservé ou à un remboursement intégral contre restitution du bien.
Pour de plus amples informations, veuillez consulter le lien suivant: Garanties légales accordées au
consommateur (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ou vous pouvez également consulter le site Web des
Centres européens des consommateurs (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
G.D. Luxembourg et Belgique: Les avantages de la garantie limitée HP s'appliquent en
complément des droits dont vous disposez au titre de la garantie de non-conformité des biens
avec le contrat de vente. Cependant, de nombreux facteurs peuvent avoir un impact sur le
bénéce de ces droits. Vos droits en tant que consommateur au titre de ces garanties ne
sont en aucune façon limités ou affectés par la garantie limitée HP. Pour de plus amples
informations, veuillez consulter le lien suivant: Garanties légales accordées au consommateur
(http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ou vous pouvez également consulter le site Web des Centres européens
des consommateurs (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/
Belgium, France, Luxemburg, and Switzerland
221
resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Les consommateurs
ont le droit de choisir de réclamer un service sous la garantie limitée HP ou auprès du vendeur au cours
d'une garantie légale de deux ans.
Suisse: Les avantages de la garantie limitée HP s'appliquent en complément des droits
dont vous disposez au titre de la garantie de non-conformité des biens avec le contrat
de vente. Cependant, de nombreux facteurs peuvent avoir un impact sur le bénéce de
ces droits. Vos droits en tant que consommateur au titre de ces garanties ne sont
en aucune façon limités ou affectés par la garantie limitée HP. Pour de plus amples
informations, veuillez consulter le lien suivant: Garanties légales accordées au consommateur
(http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ou vous pouvez également consulter le site Web des Centres européens
des consommateurs (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/
resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Les consommateurs
ont le droit de choisir de réclamer un service sous la garantie limitée HP ou auprès du vendeur au cours
d'une garantie légale.
Italy
La Garanzia limitata HP è una garanzia commerciale fornita volontariamente da HP. Di seguito sono
indicati nome e indirizzo della società HP responsabile della fornitura dei servizi coperti dalla Garanzia
limitata HP nel vostro Paese:
Italia: HP Italy S.r.l., Via G. Di Vittorio 9, 20063 Cernusco S/Naviglio
I vantaggi della Garanzia limitata HP vengono concessi ai consumatori in aggiunta ai diritti derivanti
dalla garanzia di due anni fornita dal venditore in caso di non conformità dei beni rispetto al
contratto di vendita. Tuttavia, diversi fattori possono avere un impatto sulla possibilita’ di beneciare
di tali diritti. I diritti spettanti ai consumatori in forza della garanzia legale non sono in alcun modo
limitati, né modicati dalla Garanzia limitata HP. Per ulteriori informazioni, si prega di consultare
il seguente link: Garanzia legale per i clienti (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal), oppure visitare il sito
Web dei Centri europei per i consumatori (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). I
consumatori hanno il diritto di scegliere se richiedere un servizio usufruendo della Garanzia limitata HP
oppure rivolgendosi al venditore per far valere la garanzia legale di due anni.
Spain
Su Garantía limitada de HP es una garantía comercial voluntariamente proporcionada por HP. El nombre
y dirección de las entidades HP que proporcionan la Garantía limitada de HP (garantía comercial adicional
del fabricante) en su país es:
España: HP Printing and Computing Solutions S.L. Calle Jose Echegaray 18 Las Rozas, 28232 Madrid
Los benecios de la Garantía limitada de HP son adicionales a la garantía legal de 2 años
a la que los consumidores tienen derecho a recibir del vendedor en virtud del contrato de
compraventa; sin embargo, varios factores pueden afectar su derecho a recibir los benecios bajo
dicha garantía legal. A este respecto, la Garantía limitada de HP no limita o afecta en modo alguno
los derechos legales del consumidor (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal). Para más información, consulte
el siguiente enlace: Garantía legal del consumidor o puede visitar el sitio web de los Centros
europeos de los consumidores (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-
complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Los clientes
tienen derecho a elegir si reclaman un servicio acogiéndose a la Garantía limitada de HP o al vendedor de
conformidad con la garantía legal de dos años.
222
Appendix A Service and support
Denmark
Den begrænsede HP-garanti er en garanti, der ydes frivilligt af HP. Navn og adresse på det HP-selskab, der
er ansvarligt for HP's begrænsede garanti i dit land, er som følger:
Danmark: HP Inc Danmark ApS, Engholm Parkvej 8, 3450, Allerød
Den begrænsede HP-garanti gælder i tillæg til eventuelle juridiske rettigheder, for en toårig garanti
fra sælgeren af varer, der ikke er i overensstemmelse med salgsaftalen, men forskellige faktorer kan
dog påvirke din ret til at opnå disse rettigheder. Forbrugerens lovbestemte rettigheder begrænses
eller påvirkes ikke på nogen måde af den begrænsede HP-garanti. Se nedenstående link for at få
yderligere oplysninger: Forbrugerens juridiske garanti (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) eller du kan besøge
De Europæiske Forbrugercentres websted (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
Forbrugere har ret til at vælge, om de vil gøre krav på service i henhold til HP's begrænsede garanti
eller hos sælger i henhold til en toårig juridisk garanti.
Norway
HPs garanti er en begrenset og kommersiell garanti som HP selv har valgt å tilby. Følgende lokale selskap
innestår for garantien:
Norge: HP Norge AS, Rolfbuktveien 4b, 1364 Fornebu
HPs garanti kommer i tillegg til det mangelsansvar HP har i henhold til norsk forbrukerkjøpslovgivning,
hvor reklamasjonsperioden kan være to eller fem år, avhengig av hvor lenge salgsgjenstanden
var ment å vare. Ulike faktorer kan imidlertid ha betydning for om du kvaliserer til å
kreve avhjelp iht slikt mangelsansvar. Forbrukerens lovmessige rettigheter begrenses ikke av
HPs garanti. Hvis du vil ha mer informasjon, kan du klikke på følgende kobling: Juridisk
garanti for forbruker (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) eller du kan besøke nettstedet til de
europeiske forbrukersentrene (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-
complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Forbrukere
har retten til å velge å kreve service under HPs garanti eller iht selgerens lovpålagte mangelsansvar.
Sweden
HP:s begränsade garanti är en kommersiell garanti som tillhandahålls frivilligt av HP. Namn och adress till
det HP-företag som ansvarar för HP:s begränsade garanti i ditt land är som följer:
Sverige: HP PPS Sverige AB, SE-169 73 Stockholm
Fördelarna som ingår i HP:s begränsade garanti gäller utöver de lagstadgade rättigheterna till tre års
garanti från säljaren angående varans bristande överensstämmelse gentemot köpeavtalet, men olika
faktorer kan påverka din rätt att utnyttja dessa rättigheter. Konsumentens lagstadgade rättigheter varken
begränsas eller påverkas på något sätt av HP:s begränsade garanti. Mer information får du om du
följer denna länk: Lagstadgad garanti för konsumenter (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) eller så kan du gå
till European Consumer Centers webbplats (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
Konsumenter har rätt att välja om de vill ställa krav enligt HP:s begränsade garanti eller på säljaren enligt
den lagstadgade treåriga garantin.
Portugal
A Garantia Limitada HP é uma garantia comercial fornecida voluntariamente pela HP. O nome e a morada
da entidade HP responsável pela prestação da Garantia Limitada HP no seu país são os seguintes:
Denmark
223
Portugal: HPCP – Computing and Printing Portugal, Unipessoal, Lda., Edicio D. Sancho I, Quinta da Fonte,
Porto Salvo, Lisboa, Oeiras, 2740 244
As vantagens da Garantia Limitada HP aplicam-se cumulativamente com quaisquer direitos decorrentes
da legislação aplicável à garantia de dois anos do vendedor, relativa a defeitos do produto e constante
do contrato de venda. Existem, contudo, vários fatores que poderão afetar a sua elegibilidade para
beneciar de tais direitos. Os direitos legalmente atribuídos aos consumidores não são limitados ou
afetados de forma alguma pela Garantia Limitada HP. Para mais informações, consulte a ligação
seguinte: Garantia legal do consumidor (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ou visite o Web site da
Rede dos Centros Europeus do Consumidor (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
Os consumidores têm o direito de escolher se pretendem reclamar assistência ao abrigo da Garantia
Limitada HP ou contra o vendedor ao abrigo de uma garantia jurídica de dois anos.
Greece and Cyprus
Η Περιορισμένη εγγύηση HP είναι μια εμπορική εγγύηση η οποία παρέχεται εθελοντικά από την HP. Η
επωνυμία και η διεύθυνση του νομικού προσώπου ΗΡ που παρέχει την Περιορισμένη εγγύηση ΗΡ στη χώρα
σας είναι η εξής:
Ελλάδα /Κύπρoς: HP Printing and Personal Systems Hellas EPE, Tzavella 1-3, 15232 Chalandri, Attiki
Ελλάδα /Κύπρoς: HP Συστήματα Εκτύπωσης και Προσωπικών Υπολογιστών Ελλάς Εταιρεία Περιορισμένης
Ευθύνης, Tzavella 1-3, 15232 Chalandri, Attiki
Τα προνόμια της Περιορισμένης εγγύησης HP ισχύουν επιπλέον των νόμιμων δικαιωμάτων για διετή εγγύηση
έναντι του Πωλητή για τη μη συμμόρφωση των προϊόντων με τις συνομολογημένες συμβατικά ιδιότητες, ωστόσο
η άσκηση των δικαιωμάτων σας αυτών μπορεί να εξαρτάται από διάφορους παράγοντες. Τα νόμιμα δικαιώματα
των καταναλωτών δεν περιορίζονται ούτε επηρεάζονται καθ’ οιονδήποτε τρόπο από την Περιορισμένη
εγγύηση HP. Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, συμβουλευτείτε την ακόλουθη τοποθεσία web: Νόμιμη εγγύηση
καταναλωτή (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ή μπορείτε να επισκεφτείτε την τοποθεσία web των Ευρωπαϊκών
Κέντρων Καταναλωτή (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/
resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Οι καταναλωτές έχουν το
δικαίωμα να επιλέξουν αν θα αξιώσουν την υπηρεσία στα πλαίσια της Περιορισμένης εγγύησης ΗΡ ή από τον
πωλητή στα πλαίσια της νόμιμης εγγύησης δύο ετών.
Hungary
A HP korlátozott jótállás egy olyan kereskedelmi jótállás, amelyet a HP a saját elhatározásából biztosít. Az
egyes országokban a HP mint gyártó által vállalt korlátozott jótállást biztosító vállalatok neve és címe a
jótállási jegyen vagy a termékhez csatolt egyéb dokumentumban található, vagy ennek hiányában erről az
eladó ad tájékoztatást.
Budapest, Hungary, (BUD): HP Inc Magyarország Kft. 1117 Budapest, Újbuda Allee Corner Október
huszonharmadika u. 8-10.
A HP korlátozott jótállásban biztosított jogok azokon a jogokon felül illetik meg Önt, amelyek
a termékeknek az adásvételi szerződés szerinti minőségére vonatkozó kétéves, jogszabályban foglalt
eladói szavatosságból, továbbá ha az Ön által vásárolt termékre alkalmazandó, a jogszabályban
foglalt kötelező eladói jótállásból erednek, azonban számos körülmény hatással lehet arra,
hogy ezek a jogok Önt megilletik-e. További információért kérjük, keresse fel a következő
webhelyet: Jogi Tájékoztató Fogyasztóknak (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) vagy látogassa meg az
Európai Fogyasztói Központok webhelyét (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
A fogyasztóknak jogában áll, hogy megválasszák, hogy a jótállással kapcsolatos igényüket a HP
224
Appendix A Service and support
korlátozott jótállás alapján vagy a kétéves, jogszabályban foglalt eladói szavatosság, illetve, ha
alkalmazandó, a jogszabályban foglalt kötelező eladói jótállás alapján érvényesítik.
Czech Republic
Omezená záruka HP je obchodní zárukou dobrovolně poskytovanou společností HP. Názvy a adresy
společností skupiny HP, které odpovídají za plnění omezené záruky HP ve vaší zemi, jsou následující:
Česká republika: HP Inc Czech Republic s. r. o., Za Brumlovkou 5/1559, 140 00 Praha 4
Výhody, poskytované omezenou zárukou HP, se uplatňuji jako doplňek k jakýmkoli právním nárokům na
dvouletou záruku poskytnutou prodejcem v případě nesouladu zboží s kupní smlouvou. Váš nárok na
uznání těchto práv však může záviset na mnohých faktorech. Omezená záruka HP žádným způsobem
neomezuje ani neovlivňuje zákonná práva zákazníka. Další informace získáte kliknutím na následující
odkaz: Zákonná záruka spotřebitele (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) případně můžete navštívit webové
stránky Evropského spotřebitelského centra (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
Spotřebitelé mají právo se rozhodnout, zda chtějí službu reklamovat v rámci omezené záruky HP nebo
v rámci zákonem stanovené dvouleté záruky u prodejce.
Slovakia
Obmedzená záruka HP je obchodná záruka, ktorú spoločnosť HP poskytuje dobrovoľne. Meno a adresa
subjektu HP, ktorý zabezpečuje plnenie vyplývajúce z Obmedzenej záruky HP vo vašej krajine:
Slovenská republika: HP Inc Slovakia, s.r.o., Galvaniho 7, 821 04 Bratislava
Výhody Obmedzenej záruky HP sa uplatnia vedľa prípadných zákazníkových zákonných nárokov voči
predávajúcemu z vád, ktoré spočívajú v nesúlade vlastností tovaru s jeho popisom podľa predmetnej
zmluvy. Možnosť uplatnenia takých prípadných nárokov však môže závisieť od rôznych faktorov. Služby
Obmedzenej záruky HP žiadnym spôsobom neobmedzujú ani neovplyvňujú zákonné práva zákazníka,
ktorý je spotrebiteľom. Ďalšie informácie nájdete na nasledujúcom prepojení: Zákonná záruka spotrebiteľa
(http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal), prípadne môžete navštíviť webovú lokalitu európskych zákazníckych
stredísk (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-
consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Spotrebitelia majú právo zvoliť si, či
chcú uplatniť servis v rámci Obmedzenej záruky HP alebo počas zákonnej dvojročnej záručnej lehoty
u predajcu.
Poland
Ograniczona gwarancja HP to komercyjna gwarancja udzielona dobrowolnie przez HP. Nazwa i adres
podmiotu HP odpowiedzialnego za realizację Ograniczonej gwarancji HP w Polsce:
Polska: HP Inc Polska sp. z o.o., ul. Szturmowa 2a, 02-678 Warszawa, wpisana do rejestru przedsiębiorców
prowadzonego przez Sąd Rejonowy dla m.st. Warszawy w Warszawie, XIII Wydział Gospodarczy Krajowego
Rejestru Sądowego, pod numerem KRS 0000546115, NIP 5213690563, REGON 360916326, BDO
000006211, kapitał zakładowy 480.500 PLN.
Świadczenia wynikające z Ograniczonej gwarancji HP stanowią dodatek do praw przysługujących
nabywcy w związku z dwuletnią odpowiedzialnością sprzedawcy z tytułu niezgodności towaru
z umową (rękojmia). Niemniej, na możliwość korzystania z tych praw mają wpływ różne
czynniki. Ograniczona gwarancja HP w żaden sposób nie ogranicza praw konsumenta ani
na nie nie wpływa. Więcej informacji można znaleźć pod następującym łączem: Gwarancja
prawna konsumenta (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal), można także odwiedzić stronę internetową
Europejskiego Centrum Konsumenckiego (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
Konsumenci mają prawo wyboru co do możliwosci skorzystania albo z usług gwarancyjnych
Czech Republic
225
przysługujących w ramach Ograniczonej gwarancji HP albo z uprawnień wynikających z dwuletniej rękojmi
w stosunku do sprzedawcy.
Bulgaria
Ограничената гаранция на HP представлява търговска гаранция, доброволно предоставяна от HP. Името и
адресът на дружеството на HP за вашата страна, отговорно за предоставянето на гаранционната поддръжка
в рамките на Ограничената гаранция на HP, са както следва:
HP Inc Bulgaria EOOD (Ейч Пи Инк България ЕООД), HP Inc България ЕООД, Бизнес Парк София, 1766
София, сграда 10, България
Предимствата на Ограничената гаранция на HP се прилагат в допълнение към всички законови
права за двугодишна гаранция от продавача при несъответствие на стоката с договора за продажба.
Въпреки това, различни фактори могат да окажат влияние върху условията за получаване на тези
права. Законовите права на потребителите не са ограничени или засегнати по никакъв начин от
Ограничената гаранция на HP. За допълнителна информация, моля вижте Правната гаранция на
потребителя (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) или посетете уебсайта на Европейския потребителски
център (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-
consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Потребителите имат правото да
избират дали да претендират за извършване на услуга в рамките на Ограничената гаранция на HP или
да потърсят такава от търговеца в рамките на двугодишната правна гаранция.
Romania
Garanția limitată HP este o garanție comercială furnizată în mod voluntar de către HP. Numele și adresa
entității HP răspunzătoare de punerea în aplicare a Garanției limitate HP în țara dumneavoastră sunt
următoarele:
Romănia: HP Inc Romania SRL, 5 Fabrica de Glucoza Str., Building F, Ground Floor and Floor 8, 2nd District,
Bucureşti
Beneciile Garanției limitate HP se aplică suplimentar faţă de orice drepturi privind garanţia
de doi ani oferită de vânzător pentru neconformitatea bunurilor cu contractul de vânzare;
cu toate acestea, diverşi factori pot avea impact asupra eligibilităţii dvs. de a benecia
de aceste drepturi. Drepturile legale ale consumatorului nu sunt limitate sau afectate în
vreun fel de Garanția limitată HP. Pentru informaţii suplimentare consultaţi următorul link:
garanția acordată consumatorului prin lege (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) sau puteți accesa site-
ul Centrul European al Consumatorilor (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-
rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net).
Consumatorii au dreptul să aleagă dacă să pretindă despăgubiri în cadrul Garanței limitate HP sau de
la vânzător, în cadrul garanției legale de doi ani.
Belgium and the Netherlands
De Beperkte Fabrieksgarantie van HP is een commerciële garantie vrijwillig verstrekt door HP. De naam en
het adres van de HP-entiteit die verantwoordelijk is voor het uitvoeren van de Beperkte Fabrieksgarantie
van HP in uw land is als volgt:
Nederland: HP Nederland B.V., Startbaan 16, 1187 XR Amstelveen
België: HP Belgium BV, Hermeslaan 1, Building B, B-1831 Diegem, ondernemingsnummer 0597.618.285
De voordelen van de Beperkte Fabrieksgarantie van HP vormen een aanvulling op de wettelijke garantie
voor consumenten gedurende twee jaren na de levering te verlenen door de verkoper bij een gebrek aan
conformiteit van de goederen met de relevante koopovereenkomst. Niettemin kunnen diverse factoren
een impact hebben op de eventuele aanspraak van de consument op deze wettelijke rechten. De
226
Appendix A Service and support
wettelijke rechten van de consument worden op geen enkele wijze beperkt of beïnvloed door de Beperkte
Fabrieksgarantie van HP. Raadpleeg voor meer informatie de volgende webpagina: Wettelijke garantie
voor consumenten (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) of u kan de website van het Europees Consumenten
Centrum bezoeken (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/
resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Consumenten hebben
het recht om te kiezen tussen enerzijds de Beperkte Fabrieksgarantie van HP of anderzijds het
aanspreken van de verkoper ter uitoefening van de wettelijke garantie.
Finland
HP:n rajoitettu takuu on HP:n vapaaehtoisesti antama kaupallinen takuu. HP:n myöntämästä takuusta
maassanne vastaavan HP:n edustajan yhteystiedot ovat:
Suomi: HP Finland Oy, Piispankalliontie, FIN - 02200 Espoo
HP:n takuun edut ovat voimassa mahdollisten kuluttajansuojalakiin perustuvien
oikeuksien lisäksi sen varalta, että tuote ei vastaa myyntisopimusta. Saat lisätietoja
seuraavasta linkistä: Kuluttajansuoja (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) tai voit käydä Euroopan
kuluttajakeskuksen sivustolla (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-
complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Kuluttajilla
on oikeus vaatia virheen korjausta HP:n takuun ja kuluttajansuojan perusteella HP:lta tai myyjältä.
Slovenia
Omejena garancija HP je prostovoljna trgovska garancija, ki jo zagotavlja podjetje HP. Ime in naslov
poslovne enote HP, ki je odgovorna za omejeno garancijo HP v vaši državi, sta naslednja:
Slovenija: HP Europe B.V. Meyrin Branch, Route du Nant-d'Avril 150, 1217 Meyrin, Switzerland
Ugodnosti omejene garancije HP veljajo poleg zakonskih pravic, ki ob sklenitvi kupoprodajne pogodbe
izhajajo iz dveletne garancije prodajalca v primeru neskladnosti blaga, vendar lahko na izpolnjevanje
pogojev za uveljavitev pravic vplivajo različni dejavniki. Omejena garancija HP nikakor ne omejuje
strankinih z zakonom predpisanih pravic in ne vpliva nanje. Za dodatne informacije glejte naslednjo
povezavo: Strankino pravno jamstvo (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal); ali pa obiščite spletno mesto
evropskih središč za potrošnike (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-
complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Potrošniki
imajo pravico izbrati, ali bodo uveljavljali pravice do storitev v skladu z omejeno garancijo HP ali proti
prodajalcu v skladu z dvoletno zakonsko garancijo.
Croatia
HP ograničeno jamstvo komercijalno je dobrovoljno jamstvo koje pruža HP. Ime i adresa HP subjekta
odgovornog za HP ograničeno jamstvo u vašoj državi:
Hrvatska: HP Computing and Printing d.o.o. za računalne i srodne aktivnosti, Radnička cesta 41, 10000
Zagreb
Pogodnosti HP ograničenog jamstva vrijede zajedno uz sva zakonska prava na dvogodišnje jamstvo kod
bilo kojeg prodavača s obzirom na nepodudaranje robe s ugovorom o kupnji. Međutim, razni faktori mogu
utjecati na vašu mogućnost ostvarivanja tih prava. HP ograničeno jamstvo ni na koji način ne utječe niti ne
ograničava zakonska prava potrošača. Dodatne informacije potražite na ovoj adresi: Zakonsko jamstvo
za potrošače (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) ili možete posjetiti web-mjesto Europskih potrošačkih
centara (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/resolve-your-
consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Potrošači imaju pravo odabrati žele
li ostvariti svoja potraživanja u sklopu HP ograničenog jamstva ili pravnog jamstva prodavača u trajanju
ispod dvije godine.
Finland
227
Latvia
HP ierobežotā garantija ir komercgarantija, kuru brīvprātīgi nodrošina HP. HP uzņēmums, kas sniedz HP
ierobežotās garantijas servisa nodrošinājumu jūsu valstī:
Latvija: HP Finland Oy, PO Box 515, 02201 Espoo, Finland
HP ierobežotās garantijas priekšrocības tiek piedāvātas papildus jebkurām likumīgajām tiesībām uz
pārdevēja un/vai rażotāju nodrošinātu divu gadu garantiju gadījumā, ja preces neatbilst pirkuma līgumam,
tomēr šo tiesību saņemšanu var ietekmēt vairāki faktori. HP ierobežotā garantija nekādā veidā neierobežo
un neietekmē patērētāju likumīgās tiesības. Lai iegūtu plašāku informāciju, izmantojiet šo saiti: Patērētāju
likumīgā garantija (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) vai arī Eiropas Patērētāju tiesību aizsardzības
centra tīmekļa vietni (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-complaints/
resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Patērētājiem ir tiesības
izvēlēties, vai pieprasīt servisa nodrošinājumu saskaņā ar HP ierobežoto garantiju, vai arī pārdevēja
sniegto divu gadu garantiju.
Lithuania
HP ribotoji garantija yra HP savanoriškai teikiama komercinė garantija. Toliau pateikiami HP bendrovių,
teikiančių HP garantiją (gamintojo garantiją) jūsų šalyje, pavadinimai ir adresai:
Lietuva: HP Finland Oy, PO Box 515, 02201 Espoo, Finland
HP ribotoji garantija papildomai taikoma kartu su bet kokiomis kitomis įstatymais nustatytomis teisėmis
į pardavėjo suteikiamą dviejų metų laikotarpio garantiją dėl prekių atitikties pardavimo sutarčiai, tačiau
tai, ar jums ši teisė bus suteikiama, gali priklausyti nuo įvairių aplinkybių. HP ribotoji garantija niekaip
neapriboja ir neįtakoja įstatymais nustatytų vartotojo teisių. Daugiau informacijos rasite paspaudę šią
nuorodą: Teisinė vartotojo garantija (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) arba apsilankę Europos vartotojų
centro internetinėje svetainėje (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-and-
complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Vartotojai
turi teisę prašyti atlikti techninį aptarnavimą pagal HP ribotąją garantiją arba pardavėjo teikiamą dviejų
metų įstatymais nustatytą garantiją.
Estonia
HP piiratud garantii on HP poolt vabatahtlikult pakutav kaubanduslik garantii. HP piiratud garantii eest
vastutab HP üksus aadressil:
Eesti: HP Finland Oy, PO Box 515, 02201 Espoo, Finland
HP piiratud garantii rakendub lisaks seaduses ettenähtud müüjapoolsele kaheaastasele
garantiile, juhul kui toode ei vasta müügilepingu tingimustele. Siiski võib esineda
asjaolusid, mille puhul teie jaoks need õigused ei pruugi kehtida. HP piiratud
garantii ei piira ega mõjuta mingil moel tarbija seadusjärgseid õigusi. Lisateavet leiate
järgmiselt lingilt: tarbija õiguslik garantii (http://www.hp.com/go/eu-legal) või võite külastada
Euroopa tarbijakeskuste veebisaiti (https://commission.europa.eu/live-work-travel-eu/consumer-rights-
and-complaints/resolve-your-consumer-complaint/european-consumer-centres-network-ecc-net). Tarbijal
on õigus valida, kas ta soovib kasutada HP piiratud garantiid või seadusega ette nähtud müüjapoolset
kaheaastast garantiid.
228
Appendix A Service and support
Limited Warranty Statement for HP Print Cartridges, Imaging
Drums, and Imaging Units for use with HP LaserJet Printers,
HP Laser Printers and Samsung Branded Laser Printers
This product is covered by the HP Commercial/Limited Warranty in countries/regions authorized for use/
distribution. For complete warranty details, see: hp.com/toner/info.
Long life consumable and maintenance kit limited warranty
statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the earlier of a)
the printer providing a low-life indicator on the control panel, or b) the expiration of the warranty period.
Replacement Preventative Maintenance kits or LLCs products carry a 90 day parts only limited warranty,
from the last purchase date.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with
in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the
published environmental specications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of
the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to
be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER
WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THE PRODUCT TO YOU.
HP policy on non-HP supplies
HP cannot recommend the use of non-HP toner cartridges, either new or remanufactured.
NOTE: For HP printer products, the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or a relled toner cartridge does
not affect either the warranty to the customer or any HP support contract with the customer. However, if
product failure or damage is attributable to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge or relled toner cartridge,
HP will charge its standard time and materials charges to service the product for the particular failure or
damage.
HP anticounterfeit Web site
Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP cartridge and the control-panel message
indicates the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to
resolve the problem.
Limited Warranty Statement for HP Print Cartridges, Imaging Drums, and Imaging Units for use with HP LaserJet
Printers, HP Laser Printers and Samsung Branded Laser Printers 229
Your cartridge might not be a genuine HP cartridge if you notice the following:
● The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
● You are experiencing a high number of problems with the cartridge.
● The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from HP packaging).
Data stored on the toner cartridge
The HP toner cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the
product.
In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which
might include the following: the date when the toner cartridge was rst installed, the date when the
toner cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the toner cartridge, the page coverage,
the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This
information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs.
The data collected from the toner cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to
identify a customer or user of the toner cartridge or their product.
HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from toner cartridges returned to HP's free return and
recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/hprecycle). The memory chips from this sampling are
read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this toner
cartridge might have access to this data, as well.
Any third party possessing the toner cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the
memory chip.
End User License Agreement
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE EQUIPMENT: This End-User License Agreement
("EULA") is a legal agreement between (a) you (either an individual or a single entity) and (b) HP Inc. ("HP")
that governs your use of the Sign-In Once application installed on or made available by HP for use with
your printing device (the “Software”).
An amendment or addendum to this EULA may accompany the HP Product.
RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE USING THE
SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE
LICENSE TERMS, YOUR SOLE REMEDY IS TO IMMEDIATELY STOP USING SOFTWARE AND TO UNINSTALL
THE PRODUCT FROM YOUR DEVICE.
THIS EULA IS A GLOBAL AGREEMENT AND IS NOT SPECIFIC TO ANY PARTICULAR COUNTRY, STATE OR
TERRITORY. IF YOU ACQUIRED THE SOFTWARE AS A CONSUMER WITHIN THE MEANING OF RELEVANT
CONSUMER LEGISLATION IN YOUR COUNTRY, STATE OR TERRITORY, THEN DESPITE ANYTHING TO
THE CONTRARY IN THIS EULA, NOTHING IN THIS EULA AFFECTS ANY NON EXCLUDABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OR REMEDIES THAT YOU MAY HAVE UNDER SUCH CONSUMER LEGISLATION AND THIS EULA IS
SUBJECT TO THOSE RIGHTS AND REMEDIES. REFER TO SECTION 17 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON
YOUR CONSUMER RIGHTS.
230
Appendix A Service and support
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. HP grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and
conditions of this EULA. In the case you are representing an entity or organization, the same terms
and conditions in this Section 1 shall also apply with respect to the use, copying, and storage of the
Software on the devices of your respective entity or organization.
a. Use. You may use one copy of the Software on your device for the purpose of accessing and using
the Software. You may not separate component parts of the Software for use on more than one
device. You do not have the right to distribute the Software, nor do you have the right to modify the
Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the Software. You may load the Software
into the temporary memory (RAM)of your device for purposes of using the Software.
b. Storage. You may copy the Software into the local memory or storage device of your device.
c. Copying. You may make archival or back-up copies of the Software, provided the copy contains all
of the original Software's proprietary notices and that it is used only for back-up purposes.
d. Reservation of Rights. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this
EULA.
e. Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this EULA, all or any portion of the
Software which constitutes non-proprietary HP software or software provided under public
license by third parties ("Freeware"), is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the
software license agreement or other documentation accompanying such Freeware at the time
of download, installation, or use of the Freeware. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed
entirely by the terms and conditions of such license.
2. UPGRADES. To use Software identied as an upgrade, you must rst be licensed for the original
Software identied by HP as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the
original Software Product that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
3. ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This EULA applies to updates or supplements to the original Software
provided by HP unless HP provides other terms along with the update or supplement. In case of a
conict between such terms, the other terms will prevail.
4. TRANSFER.
a. Third Party. The initial user of the Software may make a one-time transfer of the Software to
another end user. Any transfer must include all component parts, media, printed materials, this
EULA, and if applicable, the Certicate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer,
such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred product
must agree to all the EULA terms. Upon transfer of the Software, your license is automatically
terminated.
b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software or use the Software for commercial
timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license or Software
except as expressly provided in this EULA.
5. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and user documentation
are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including but not limited to United
States copyright, trade secret, and trademark law, as well as other applicable laws and international
treaty provisions. You shall not remove any product identication, copyright notices or proprietary
restrictions from the Software.
6. LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble
the Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is mandated under applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or it is expressly provided for in this EULA.
End User License Agreement
231
7. TERM. This EULA is effective unless terminated or rejected. This EULA will also terminate upon
conditions set forth elsewhere in this EULA or if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this
EULA.
8. ACCOUNT SET-UP.
a. You must register and establish an account on HP ID in order to use the Software. It is your
responsibility to obtain and maintain all equipment, services and software needed for access to
and use of the HP ID account, any applications linked via this Software, and your device(s), as well
as paying any applicable charges.
b. YOU ARE SOLELY AND FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING THE CONFIDENTIALITY OF
ANY USERNAMES AND PASSWORDS COLLECTED BY THE SOFTWARE. You must notify HP
immediately of any unauthorized use of your HP ID account or any other breach of security
related to this Software or the device(s) it is installed on.
9. NOTICE OF DATA COLLECTION. HP may collect usernames, passwords, device IP addresses, and/or
other authentication information used by you to access HP ID and the various applications connected
via this Software. HP may use this data to optimize Software performance based on user preferences,
provide support and maintenance, and assure security and software integrity. You can read more
about the data collection in the sections titled “What Data We Collect” and “How We Use Data” in the
HP Privacy Statement.
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
HP AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE “AS IS” AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND HEREBY
DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, DUTIES, AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES: (i) OF TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT;
(ii) OF MERCHANTABILITY; (iii) OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE; (iv) THAT THE SOFTWARE
WILL FUNCTION WITH NON-HP SUPPLIES OR ACCESSORIES; AND (v), OF LACK OF VIRUSES ALL WITH
REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties
or limitations on the duration of implied warranties, so the above disclaimer may not apply to you in its
entirety.
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Subject to local law, notwithstanding any damages that you might
incur, the entire liability of HP and any of its suppliers under any provision of this EULA and your
exclusive remedy for all of the foregoing shall be limited to the greater of the amount actually
paid by you separately for the Software or U.S. $5.00. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OR CONFIDENTIAL OR OTHER INFORMATION, FOR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY) ARISING OUT OF
OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer
Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed
to the U.S. Government under HP's standard commercial license.
13. COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You shall comply with all laws and regulations of the United
States and other countries ("Export Laws") to assure that the Software is not (1) exported, directly or
indirectly, in violation of Export Laws, or (2) used for any purpose prohibited by Export Laws, including,
without limitation, nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
232
Appendix A Service and support
14. CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority
in your state of residence and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer to enter into this
contract.
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of the State of California, U.S.A.
16. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. Unless you have entered into a separate license agreement for the Software,
this EULA (including any addendum or amendment to this EULA which is included with the HP Product)
is the entire agreement between you and HP relating to the Software and it supersedes all prior or
contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals and representations with respect to the
Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. To the extent the terms of any HP policies
or programs for support services conict with the terms of this EULA, the terms of this EULA shall
control.
17. CONSUMER RIGHTS. Consumers in some countries, states or territories may have the benet of
certain statutory rights and remedies under consumer legislation in respect of which HP’s liability
cannot lawfully be excluded or limited. If you acquired the Software as a consumer within the
meaning of relevant consumer legislation in your country, state or territory, the provisions of this EULA
(including the disclaimers of warranties, limitations and exclusions of liability) must be read subject to
applicable law and apply only to the maximum extent permitted by that applicable law.
Australian Consumers: If you acquired the Software as a consumer within the meaning of the
‘Australian Consumer Law’ under the Australian Competition and Consumer Act 2010 (Cth) then
despite any other provision of this EULA:
a. the Software comes with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer
Law, including that goods will be of acceptable quality and services will be supplied with due care
and skill. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any
other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the Software repaired
or replaced if it is not of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure
b. nothing in this EULA excludes, restricts or modies any right or remedy, or any guarantee,
warranty or other term or condition implied or imposed by the Australian Consumer Law which
cannot be lawfully excluded or limited; and
c. the benets provided to you by the express warranties in this EULA are in addition to other
rights and remedies available to you under the Australian Consumer Law. Your rights under the
Australian Consumer Law prevail to the extent that they are inconsistent with any limitations
contained in the express warranty.
The Software may be capable of retaining user-generated data. HP hereby provides you with
notice that if HP repairs your Software, that repair may result in the loss of that data. To the full
extent permitted by law, the limitations and exclusions of HP’s liability in this EULA apply in respect
of any such loss of data.
If you think that you are entitled to any warranty under this agreement or any of the above
remedies, please contact HP:
Table A-1
HP PPS Australia Pty Ltd
Building F, 1 Homebush Bay
Drive
Rhodes, NSW 2138
Australia
End User License Agreement 233
To initiate a support request or warranty claim, please call 13 10 47 (within Australia) or +61 2 8278
1039 (if dialing internationally) or visit www.hp.com.au and select the “Support” tab for the most
current customer service options.
If you are a consumer within the meaning of the Australia Consumer Law and you are purchasing the
Software or warranty and support services for the Software which are not of a kind ordinarily acquired
for personal, domestic or household use or consumption, then despite any other provision of this
EULA, HP limits its liability for failure to comply with a consumer guarantee as follows:
a. provision of warranty or support services for the Software: to any one or more of the following:
re-supply of the services or payment of the costs of having the services re-supplied;
b. provision of the Software: to any one or more of the following: replacement of the Software or
the supply of equivalent software; repair of the Software; payment of the costs of replacing the
Software or of acquiring equivalent software; or payment of the costs of having the Software
repaired; and
c. otherwise, to the maximum extent permitted by law.
New Zealand Consumers: In New Zealand, the Software comes with guarantees that cannot be
excluded under the Consumer Guarantees Act 1993. In New Zealand, Consumer Transaction means
a transaction involving a person who is purchasing goods for personal, domestic or household
use or consumption and not for the purpose of a business. New Zealand consumers who are
purchasing goods for personal, domestic or household use or consumption and not for the purpose
of a business ("New Zealand Consumers") are entitled to repair, replacement or refund for a failure
and compensation for other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. A New Zealand Consumer (as
dened above) may recover the costs of returning the product to the place of purchase if there
is a breach of the New Zealand consumer law; furthermore, if it will be of signicant cost to the
New Zealand Consumer to return the goods to HP then HP will collect such goods at its own cost.
Where any supply of products or services is for business purposes, you agree that the Consumer
Guarantees Act 1993 does not apply and that given the nature and value of the transaction, this is fair
and reasonable.
© Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. All other product names mentioned
herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. To the extent permitted by applicable law,
the only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. To the extent permitted by applicable law, HP shall not be liable for technical or
editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Version: April 2019
Customer self-repair warranty service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and
allow for greater exibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period, HP
identies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to
you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is
mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs
of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for
Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no
additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.
234
Appendix A Service and support
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day
delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits.
If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over
the phone. HP species in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part
must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the
defective part back to HP within a dened period of time, normally ve (5) business days. The defective
part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to
return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP
will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used.
Customer support
Get telephone support for your country/region
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and
problem description ready.
Country/region phone numbers are on the yer that was in the
box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/.
Get 24-hour Internet support, and download software utilities
and drivers
www.hp.com/support/lj5600dn/fMFP
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements www.hp.com/go/carepack
Register your product www.register.hp.com
Customer support 235
Environmental product stewardship
program
B
Protecting the environment
HP is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been
designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Battery information
This product may contain a:
● Poly-carbonmonouoride lithium (BR type) or
● Manganese dioxide lithium (CR type)
battery that may require special handling at end-of-life.
NOTE: NOTE for CR type only: Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See http://dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Weight: ~3 g
Location: On motherboard
User Removable: No
廢電池請回收
For recycling information, you can contact www.hp.com/hprecycle or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: http://www.eiae.org.
Battery Notice for Brazil (for printers with non-removable
battery)
A bateria deste equipamento não foi projetada para ser removida pelo cliente.
236
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
Chemical substances
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our
products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of
the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at:
www.hp.com/go/reach.
Electronic hardware recycling
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware. For more information about recycling
programs go to: www.hp.com/hprecycle.
EPEAT
EPEAT is an Electronic Product Environmental Assessment Tool used to evaluate the effects of a product
on the environment.
HP products are designed to meet EPEAT criteria. Click here for information on HP's EPEAT registered
products.
For more information on EPEAT, go to EPEAT.net.
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can
be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/ecodata.
Ozone production
The airborne emissions of ozone for this product has been measured according to a standardized
protocol* and when these emissions data are applied to an anticipated high-use scenario in an ofce
workspace**, HP has determined there is no appreciable amount of ozone generated during printing and
the levels are well within current indoor air quality standards and guidelines.
* Test method for the determination of emissions from hardcopy devices with respect to awarding the
environmental label for ofce devices with printing function; RAL-UZ 219 - BAM January, 2021
** Based on ozone concentration when printing 2 hours per day in 30.6 cubic meter room with a ventilation
rate of 0.68 air changes per hour with HP printing supplies
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled paper and lightweight paper (EcoFFICIENT™) when the paper
meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable
for the use of recycled paper and lightweight paper (EcoFFICIENT™) according to EN12281:2002.
Chemical substances
237
Paper use
This product’s duplex feature (manual or automatic) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page)
capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
Power consumption
Power usage drops
signicantly while in Ready, Sleep, or Off mode, which saves natural resources and
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. HP printing and imaging equipment
marked with the ENERGY STAR
®
logo is qualied to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's ENERGY
STAR specications for imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualied
imaging products:
Additional ENERGY STAR qualied imaging product model information is listed at:
www.hp.com/go/energystar
HP LaserJet print supplies
Original HP Supplies were designed with the environment in mind. HP makes it easy to conserve resources
and paper when printing. And when you are done, we make it easy and free to recycle.
1
All HP cartridges returned to HP Planet Partners go through a multiphase recycling process where
materials are separated and rened for use as raw material in new Original HP cartridges and everyday
products. No Original HP cartridges returned through HP Planet Partners are ever sent to a landll, and HP
never rells or resells Original HP cartridges.
To participate in the HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, visit www.hp.com/hprecycle.
Select your country/region for information on how to return HP printing supplies. Multi-lingual
program information and instructions are also included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge
package.
1
Program availability varies. For more information, visit www.hp.com/hprecycle.
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. HP does not recommend the
full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical
parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider
replacing the print cartridge.
238
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
● Product environmental prole sheet for this and many related HP products
● HP’s commitment to the environment
● HP’s environmental management system
● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
● Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment.
Also, visit www.hp.com/hprecycle.
Brazil hardware recycling information
Este produto eletrônico e seus componentes não devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora
estejam em conformidade com padrões mundiais de restrição a substâncias nocivas, podem conter,
ainda que em quantidades mínimas, substâncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao nal da vida útil deste
produto, o usuário deverá entregá-lo à HP. A não observância dessa orientação sujeitará o infrator às
sanções previstas em lei.
Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP deverão ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial
ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada pela HP.
Para maiores informações, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse:
www.hp.com.br/reciclar
For more information 239
Substances Table (China)
CHR-LJ-PK-MFP-03
SEPA Ecolabel User Information (China)
中国环境标识认证产品用户说明
噪声大于 63.0 dB(A)的办公设备不宜放置于办公室内，请在独立的隔离区域使用。
如需长时间使用本产品或打印大量文件，请确保在通风良好的房间内使用。
如您需要确认本产品处于零能耗状态，请按下电源关闭按钮，并将插头从电源插座断开。
您可以使用再生纸，以减少资源耗费。
240
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
The regulation of the implementation on China energy label
for printer, fax, and copier
依据“复印机、打印机和传真机能源效率标识实施规则”，本打印机具有中国能效标签。根据“复印机、打印
机和传真机能效限定值及 能效等级” (“GB21521”) 决定并计算得出该标签上所示的能效等级和 TEC (典型
能耗) 值。
1. 能效等级
能效等级分为三个等级，等级 1 级能效最高。 根据产品类型和打印速度标准决定能效限定值。
2. 能效信息
2.1 LaserJet 打印机和高性能喷墨打印机
● 典型能耗
典型能耗是正常运行 GB21521 测试方法中指定的时间后的耗电量。 此数据表示为每周千瓦时
(kWh)。
标签上所示的能效数字按涵盖根据“复印机、打印机和传真机能源效率标识实施规则”选择的登记装置中
所有配置的代表性配置测定而 得。因此，本特定产品型号的实际能耗可能与标签上所示的数据不同。
有关规格的详细信息，请参阅 GB21521 标准的当前版本。
Disposal of waste equipment by users (EU, UK, and India)
This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should
protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated
collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information,
please contact your household waste disposal service, or go to: www.hp.com/hprecycle.
EU Microplastics
The regulation of the implementation on China energy label for printer, fax, and copier 241
Product Power Data per European Union Commission
Regulation 1275/2008 (EU)
For product power data, including the power consumption of the product in networked standby if all
wired network ports are connected and all wireless network ports are activated, please refer to section
P14 ‘Additional Information’ of the product IT ECO Declaration at www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/
environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html.
India Battery Waste Management (BWM) Rules
EPR Registration No: 141163
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (India)
This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous
substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016." It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent
chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1
weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in
Schedule 2 of the Rule.
242
Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
Substances Table (Taiwan)
Substances Table (Taiwan) 243
WEEE (Turkey)
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
244 Appendix B Environmental product stewardship program
Regulatory informationC
Regulatory statements
Regulatory model identication numbers
For regulatory identication purposes, your product is assigned a regulatory model number. Regulatory
model numbers should not be confused with marketing names or product numbers.
Table C-1 Regulatory model identication numbers
Product model number Regulatory model number
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5601dn BOISB-2401-00
European Union & United Kingdom Regulatory Notice
Products bearing the CE marking and UKCA marking comply with one or more of the following EU
Directives and/or equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable: Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU, EMC Directive 2014/30/EU, Eco Design Directive 2009/125/EC, RED 2014/53/EU, RoHS
Directive 2011/65/EU, Battery Regulation 2023/1542.
Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonized Standards. The full
EU and UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: www.hp.com/go/certicates
(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the
regulatory label.)
The point of contact for regulatory matters is: Email r[email protected]
The EU point of contact for regulatory matters is:
HP REG 23010, 08028, Barcelona, Spain
The UK point of contact for regulatory matters is:
HP Inc UK Ltd, Regulatory Enquiries, Earley West, 300 Thames Valley Park Drive, Reading, RG6 1PT
The product meets the requirements of EN 55032 and its equivalent UK/BS EN standard, in which case the
following applies: 'Warning – This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.'
Regulatory information
245
European Union Consumer Laser Product
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
CONSUMER LASER PRODUCT
EN 50689:2021
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
NOTE: Any changes or modications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
Australia/New Zealand
WARNING! This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Canada - Industry Canada ICES Compliance Statement
CAN ICES (A)/NMB (A)
VCCI statement (Japan)
VCCI 32-1 規定適合の場合
Power cord instructions
Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the
product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz.
Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product.
NOTE: Symbol "~" represents alternating current.
246
Appendix C Regulatory information
Power cord statement (Japan)
Product Safety Statements
Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.
Do not use paper tray as a step.
All trays must be closed while relocating/moving product.
Keep hands out of paper tray when closing.
If the printer has a keyboard, close keyboard tray when not in use.
EMC statement (China)
婗⌻ˤ☙⬶Ṁ䊠❴ᴞ˖廁圽㩕媯⟸⋠修ḋ弑㓑䶰䐦ⵣㅡǎ
EMC statement (Korea)
이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성평가를 받은 기기로서 가정용 환경에서 사용하는 경우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다
EMC statement (Taiwan)
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certied as a “Class 1” laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the
device is completely conned within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specied
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
For other US/Canada regulatory matters, please contact:
HP Inc.
1501 Page Mill Rd, Palo Alto, CA 94304, USA
Email contact: r[email protected] or Telephone contact: +1 (650) 857-1501
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Power cord statement (Japan)
247
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5601dn, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite.
Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen
turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1:2014 +A11:2021 mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specicerats, kan användaren utsättas för
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet Enterprise MFP 5601dn - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia
kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän
käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman
erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-800 nm Teho 5 m W
Luokan 3B laser.
Nordic Statements (Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden)
Denmark:
Apparatets stikprop skal tilsuttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord.
Finland:
Laite on liitettävä suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan.
Norway:
Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt.
Sweden:
Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag.
GS statement (Germany)
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz
vorgesehen. Um störende Reexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht
im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
248
Appendix C Regulatory information
Das Gerät ist kein Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV. Bei ungünstigen Lichtverhältnissen (z. B.
direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reexionen auf dem Display und damit zu Einschränkungen der
Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen.
Die Bilddarstellung dieses Gerätes ist nicht für verlängerte Bildschirmtätigkeiten geeignet.
Eurasian Conformity (Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan)
Taiwan BSMI USB Port (Walk-up) statement
台灣 BSMI USB 埠 (Walk-up) 聲明
Eurasian Conformity (Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan)
249
產品前端, 上方或側邊之 USB 埠 (walk-up 埠), 僅支持隨身碟.
Battery statements
Coin/button cell battery safety statements
The following statements are only applicable for products with a coin/button cell battery.
WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed,
it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death.
WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children.
WARNING! If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it
away from children.
WARNING! If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
250
Appendix C Regulatory information
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2,000-sheet high-capacity input
tray
clear jams 144
3-bin stapler/stacker
clear staple jams 144
550-sheet paper trays
part numbers 29
550-sheet trays
jams 144
A
accessories
ordering 28
part numbers 29
acoustic specications 11
AirPrint 49, 50
alternative letterhead mode 12,
24
Android devices
printing from 49, 51
anticounterfeit supplies 217, 229
B
batteries included 236, 237
battery notice,Brazil 236
Battery Waste Management
(BWM) 242
bin, output
locating 2
Bonjour
identifying 118
browser requirements
HP Embedded Web
Server 118
C
calibrate
scanner 195
cartridge
replacing 35
cartridge policy 30, 31
cartridges
non-HP 217, 229
order numbers 35
recycling 236, 238
warranty 217, 229
ce marking 245
checklist
wireless connectivity 210
Class 1 consumer laser 246
cleaning
glass 195, 199, 204
paper path 183
control panel
help 135
locating 2
locating features 4
copy
optimize for text or
pictures 195
copy settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 122
copying
overview 55
counterfeit supplies 217, 229
customer support
online 135, 217, 235
D
default gateway, setting 129, 130
deleting
stored jobs 46, 48
digital send settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 122
digital sending
folders 98
printer memory 96
sending documents 93
USB 103
dimensions, printer 10
disposal, end-of-life 236, 237
document feeder
jams 144
locating 2
paper-feeding problems 138,
143
double-sided printing
Mac 44
Windows 41
drivers, supported 8
duplex printing
Mac 44
duplex printing (double-sided)
settings (Windows) 41
Windows 41
duplexing
manually (Mac) 44
manually (Windows) 41
E
easy-access USB port
locating 2
easy-access USB printing 51
EconoMode setting 183
edge-to-edge copying 195
electrical specications 11
electronic hardware
recycling 236, 237
Embedded Web Server
changing network
settings 128
changing printer name 129
opening 128
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
assigning passwords 131
features 118
network connection 118
end-of-life disposal 236, 237
energy use, optimizing 133
envelopes
orientation 12
envelopes, loading 24
environmental stewardship
program 236
eu microplastics 241
Eurasian conformity 245, 249
Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web
Server 118
F
fax
block 116
feeding problems 213, 215
locating 3
optimize for text or
pictures 204
overview 107
required settings 107
Index
251
settings 108, 111, 116
setup 107
fax settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 124
required 107
FCC regulations 245, 246
feeding problems 213, 215
Finnish laser safety
statement 245, 247
folders
sending to 98
fraud Web site 217, 229
fuser
jams 144
G
gateway, setting default 129, 130
general conguration
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 121
genuine HP cartridges 30, 31
glass, cleaning 195, 199, 204
H
hard disks
encrypted 131, 133
Hardware integration pocket (HIP)
locating 2
hardware recycling, Brazil 236,
239
Help button
locating 4
help, control panel 135
Home button
locating 4
HP Customer Care 135, 217, 235
HP Embedded Web Server
changing network
settings 128
changing printer name 129
copy settings 118, 119, 122
digital send settings 118, 119,
122
fax settings 118, 119, 124
general conguration 118,
119, 121
HP Web Services 118, 119,
126
information pages 118-120
network settings 118, 119,
127
opening 128
other links list 118, 119
print settings 118, 119, 122
scan settings 118, 119, 122
security settings 118, 119,
125
supplies 124
troubleshooting tools 118,
119, 125
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
features 118
network connection 118
HP fraud Web site 217, 229
HP JetAdvantage business
solutions 105
HP Web Jetadmin 134
HP Web Services
enabling 118, 119, 126
I
image quality
check toner cartridge
status 183
check toner-cartridge
status 185
information pages
HP Embedded Web
Server 118-120
interface ports
locating 3
Internet Explorer, versions
supported
HP Embedded Web
Server 118
IP Security 131, 132
IPsec 131, 132
IPv4 address 129
IPv6 address 130
J
jams
2,000-sheet high-capacity input
tray 144
550-sheet trays 144
auto-navigation 144
causes of 144, 145
document feeder 144
fuser 144
locations 144
lower-right door 144
output bin 144
right door 144
stapler/stacker
accessory 144
staples in the 3-bin stapler/
stacker 144
Tray 1 144
Tray 2 144
Japanese VCCI statement 245,
246
Jetadmin, HP Web 134
JetAdvantage 105
jobs, stored
creating (Windows) 46
deleting 46, 48
Mac settings 46
printing 46, 48
K
Korean EMC statement 245, 247
L
label
orientation 26
labels
orientation, loading 27
printing (Windows) 41
printing on 26
labels, loading 26
LAN
locating 3
laser safety statements 245, 247
license, software 217, 230
loading
paper in Tray 1 12
paper in Tray 2 18
paper in Tray 3 18
paper in Tray 4 18
paper in Tray 5 18
lock
formatter 131, 133
lower-right door
clear jams 144
M
Mac driver settings
Job Storage 46
managing network 128
managing the printer
overview 118
manual duplex
Mac 44
Windows 41
margins, small
copying 195
material restrictions 236, 237
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 236, 237
252
Index
memory
included 7
memory chip (toner)
locating 35
memory chip, toner cartridge
description 217, 230
mercury-free product 236, 237
mobile printing
Android devices 49, 51
mobile printing, software
supported 9
multiple pages per sheet
printing (Mac) 44
printing (Windows) 41
N
Near Field Communication
printing 49
Netscape Navigator, versions
supported
HP Embedded Web
Server 118
network
printer name, changing 129
settings, changing 128
settings, viewing 128
network duplex settings,
changing 130
Network Folder, scan to 98
network link speed settings,
changing 130
network settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 127
networks
default gateway 129, 130
HP Web Jetadmin 134
IPv4 address 129
IPv6 address 130
subnet mask 129, 130
supported 7
NFC connect and print 49
non-HP supplies 217, 229
O
on/off button
locating 2
online help, control panel 135
online support 135, 217, 235
operating systems, supported 8
operating-environment range
printer 11
optimize copy images 195
optimize fax images 204
optimize scanned images 199
ordering
supplies and accessories 28
orientation
labels 27
other links list
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119
output bin
clear jams 144
locating 2
P
pages per minute 7
pages per sheet
selecting (Mac) 44
selecting (Windows) 41
paper
jams 144, 145
loading Tray 1 12
loading Tray 2 18
loading Tray 3 18
loading Tray 4 18
loading Tray 5 18
selecting 183, 186
Tray 1 orientation 12, 15
Tray X orientation 21
paper jams
2,000-sheet high-capacity input
tray 144
550-sheet trays 144
document feeder 144
fuser 144
locations 144
lower-right door 144
output bin 144
right door 144
stapler/stacker
accessory 144
Tray 1 144
Tray 2 144
paper pickup problems
solving 138-140
paper trays
overview 12
part numbers 29
paper type
selecting (Windows) 41
paper types
selecting (Mac) 44
paper, ordering 28
part numbers
accessories 29
replacement parts 29
supplies 28
toner cartridges 28
potential shock hazard 2
power
consumption 11
power connection
locating 3
power usage 133
print drivers, supported 8
print media
loading in Tray 1 12
print on both sides
Mac 44
manually, Windows 41
Windows 41
print settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 122
printer
operating-environment
range 11
overview 1
printer memory
sending to 96
printer memory, scan to 96
printing
from USB storage
accessories 51
overview 41
stored jobs 46, 48
printing on both sides
settings (Windows) 41
private printing 46
product number
location 3
protect supplies 30, 33
R
rear door, jam access
locating 3
recycling 236, 238
electronic hardware 236, 237
replacement parts
part numbers 29
replacing
toner cartridge 35
required settings
fax 107
reset factory settings 136
right door
jams 144
S
safety statements 245, 247
Index
253
Save to printer memory 96
scan settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 122
Scan to Network Folder 98
initial setup 74
Scan to USB Drive 103
enabling 90
scanner
calibrate 195
glass cleaning 195, 199, 204
scanning
optimize for text or
pictures 199
overview 60
scanning to email
sending documents 93
scanning to folder 98
scanning to printer folder 96
scanning to printer memory 96
scanning to USB 103
security
encrypted hard disk 131, 133
security settings
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 125
sending to email
sending documents 93
serial number
locating 3
settings
fax 108, 111, 116
reset to factory (default)
settings 136
Sign In button
locating 4
Sign Out button
locating 4
sleep delay
setting 133
small margins 195
software
software license
agreement 217, 230
special paper
printing (Windows) 41
specications
electrical and acoustic 11
speed, optimizing 133
staple jams
3-bin stapler/stacker 144
stapler/stacker accessory
clear jams 144
status, fax accessory page 213
storage, job
Mac settings 46
store print jobs 46
stored jobs
creating (Mac) 46
creating (Windows) 46
deleting 46, 48
printing 46, 48
storing jobs
with Windows 46
subnet mask 129, 130
supplies
counterfeit 217, 229
HP Embedded Web
Server 124
low threshold settings 137
non-HP 217, 229
ordering 28
part numbers 28
recycling 236, 238
replacing toner cartridge 35
using when low 137
supply protection 30, 33
support
online 135, 217, 235
supported operating systems 8
system requirements
HP Embedded Web
Server 118
T
Taiwan EMC statement 247
Taiwan EMI statement 245
TCP/IP
manually conguring IPv4
parameters 129
manually conguring IPv6
parameters 130
technical support
online 135, 217, 235
toner cartridge
components 35
low threshold settings 137
replacing 35
using when low 137
toner cartridges
components 35
memory chips 217, 230
non-HP 217, 229
order numbers 35
part numbers 28
recycling 236, 238
See toner cartridges
warranty 217, 229
touchscreen
locating features 4
transparencies
printing (Windows) 41
Tray 1
jams 144
loading envelopes 24
locating 2
paper orientation 12, 15
Tray 2
jams 144
loading 18
locating 2
paper orientation 21
Tray 3
loading 18
paper orientation 21
Tray 4
loading 18
Tray 5
loading 18
trays
capacity 7
included 7
locating 2
use alternative letterhead
mode 24
troubleshooting
check toner cartridge
status 183
check toner-cartridge
status 185
jams 144, 145
network problems 208
overview 135
paper feed problems 138
wired network 208
wireless network 210
troubleshooting tools
HP Embedded Web
Server 118, 119, 125
two-sided printing
settings (Windows) 41
U
USB
sending to 103
USB port
enabling 51, 53
USB storage accessories
printing from 51
254
Index
W
warranty
customer self repair 217, 234
license 217, 230
product 217
toner cartridges 217, 229
waste disposal 236, 241
web browser requirements
HP Embedded Web
Server 118
Web sites
customer support 217, 235
fraud reports 217, 229
Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) 236, 237
websites
customer support 135
HP Web Jetadmin,
downloading 134
weight, printer 10
Wi-Fi Direct Print 9, 49
wireless network
troubleshooting 210
wireless network
interference 210, 213
Index
255
